2
For this instrument
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply
(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or
adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name
plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where any-
one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or con-
necting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not
recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum
wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller
the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For
longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied
or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a
cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and
instructions that accompany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be cor-
rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right
to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or
obligation to update existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound
levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT oper-
ate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level
that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ring-
ing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as
optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be
dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches
are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well
secured BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No
other uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to
how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as
designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and
are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual
carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and
environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products
and the production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we
want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery
which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span
of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replace-
ment becomes necessary, contact a qualified service represen-
tative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of
these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being
charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended
for the battery being charged.
When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones,
and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be
installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may
result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all
batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly
and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any
retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery dis-
posal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for
some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please
observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the
disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If
your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha
directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The
model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are
located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below
and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
(FCC DoC)
3
For AC adaptor and this instrument
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifica-
tions not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your author-
ity, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for
Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements
provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in harmful
interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gen-
erates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic
devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee
that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product
is found to be the source of interference, which can be deter-
mined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected
by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change
the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute
this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate
retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Elec-
tronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park,
CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distrib-
uted by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
(class B)
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
4
For AC adaptor
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and main-
tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-
ature accompanying the product.
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta-
cles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-
pod, bracket, or table specified
by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination
to avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-
vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-
aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate nor-
mally, or has been dropped.
(UL60065_03)
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
(can_b_02)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
(bottom_en_01)
The model number, serial number, power require-
ments, etc., may be found on or near the name
plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should
note this serial number in the space provided below
and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase to aid identification in the event of
theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
5
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
For AC adaptor
WARNING
• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic
instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.
• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.
CAUTION
• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily
accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately
turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC
adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the
AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum
level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the
power cord from the wall AC outlet.
For this instrument
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or
even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These
precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the
cord, or place heavy objects on it.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 77) only. Using the wrong
adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open
the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal
components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp
or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases,
bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any
openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument,
turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from
the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning
item may fall over and cause a fire.
• Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in
explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage.
- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.
- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
Power supply/AC adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
Battery
DMI-5 1/3
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
6
- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be
charged.
- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as
necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys.
- Use the specified battery type (page 77) only.
- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model,
and made by the same manufacturer.
- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with
the +/- polarity markings.
- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be
used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument.
- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came
with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when
charging.
• Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally
swallow them.
• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the
battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or
skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery
fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or
chemical burns.
• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet.
(If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the
instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service
personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you
or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not
limited to, the following:
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a
multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or
possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord
can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is
not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical
storms.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to
prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip
over them.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are
using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,
immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug
from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off,
electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level.
When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to
unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause
damage to the internal components or result in the instrument
falling over.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,
turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on
or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum
levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the
instrument to set the desired listening level.
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps
on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you
or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or
operational failure.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the
instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,
switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period
of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can
cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss
or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC adaptor
Location
Connections
Handling caution
DMI-5 2/3
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
7
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage
to the product, damage to data, or damage to
other property, follow the notices below.
Handling
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,
stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric
devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may
generate noise. When you use the instrument along with
an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we
recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that
device in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or
vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct
sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to
the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified
operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the
instrument, since this might discolor the panel or
keyboard.
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not
use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Saving data
• Some of the data of this instrument (page 49) are retained
when the power is turned off. However, the saved data
may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake,
etc. Save your important data onto an external device
such as a computer (page 48).
Information
About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data
including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data
is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which
Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which
Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to
copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT
allowed to distribute media in which these contents are
saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very
similar to those in the product.
* The contents described above include a computer
program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE
data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.
* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your
performance or music production using these contents
is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation
is not required in such cases.
About functions/data bundled with the
instrument
• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or
arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the
original.
About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this
manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
• iPhone, iPad, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this manual
are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
DMI-5 3/3
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
8
About the Manuals
In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available.
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.
MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do.
Computer-related Operations
Contains instructions about computer-related functions.
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.
To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for
searching the desired files.
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After
completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of
charge.
Yamaha Online Member
https://member.yamaha.com/
You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this
manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.
Included Accessories
• Owner’s Manual (this book)
• AC adaptor
*1
• Music rest
• Online Member Product Registration
*2
*1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer.
*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Formats and functions
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI
standard which ensures that any GM-compati-
ble music data can be accurately played by any
GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of
manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all
software and hardware products that support
GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified ver-
sion of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone genera-
tion format. Naturally, you can play back any
XG song data using an XGlite tone generator.
However, keep in mind that some songs may
play back differently compared to the original
data, due to the reduced set of control parame-
ters and effects.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial
Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a
computer with peripheral devices. It allows
“hot swapping” (connecting peripheral
devices while the power to the computer is
on).
Style File Format (SFF)
The Style File Format combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how
into a single unified format.
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch Response
feature gives you maximum expressive
control over the level of the Voices.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
9
Setting UpAppendix Reference
About the Manuals................................................ 8
Included Accessories............................................ 8
Formats and functions .......................................... 8
Setting Up
Panel Controls and Terminals 10
Setting Up 12
Power Requirements .......................................... 12
Turning the Power On......................................... 13
Setting the Auto Power Off function.................... 13
Adjusting the Master Volume.............................. 14
Connecting Headphones or External Speaker ... 14
Using a Pedal (Sustain)...................................... 14
Using the music rest ........................................... 14
Display Items and Basic Operations 15
Display Items ...................................................... 15
Basic Operations ................................................ 15
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16
Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16
Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 16
Using the Metronome ......................................... 16
Layering a Dual Voice......................................... 17
Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 17
Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard
... 18
Applying Effects to the Sound............................. 18
Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 19
Playing the keyboard with two persons
(Duo mode) 21
Playing Styles 22
Using the Music Database.................................. 23
Registering a Style File....................................... 23
Style Variations—Sections ................................. 24
Changing the Tempo .......................................... 24
Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 25
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
... 26
Playing Songs 27
Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 27
Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 27
BGM Playback.................................................... 28
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause... 28
Changing the Melody Voice................................ 28
A-B Repeat ......................................................... 29
Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 29
Playing an External Audio Device with the
Built-in Speakers 30
Lowering the volume of a melody part
(Melody Suppressor function) ........................ 31
Using the Song Lesson Feature 32
Downloading the Song Book ...............................33
Keys To Success.................................................33
Phrase Repeat.....................................................35
Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................36
Learning How to Use “Touch” Control
(Touch Tutor) 38
Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of
the Chords (Chord Study) 39
Hear and experience a sound of a single chord
...39
Hear and experience basic chord progressions
...39
Playing Chords along with Chord
Progressions of a Song 40
Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of
the Lesson function.........................................40
Recording Your Performance 41
Track Structure of a Song....................................41
Quick Recording ..................................................41
Recording to a Specified Track ...........................42
Clearing a User Song ..........................................42
Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 43
Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration
Memory...........................................................43
Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration
Memory...........................................................43
Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound
44
The Functions 45
Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 48
Connecting to a computer ...................................48
Connecting an iPhone/iPad .................................48
Backup and Initialization 49
Backup Parameters .............................................49
Initialization..........................................................49
Appendix
Troubleshooting .............................................50
Song Book Sample.........................................52
Voice List ........................................................62
Drum Kit List...................................................67
Song List .........................................................70
Style List .........................................................71
Music Database List.......................................72
Effect Type List...............................................73
Specifications.................................................76
Index ................................................................78
Contents
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the
advanced and convenient functions of the instrument.
We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
10
Setting Up
Panel Controls and Terminals
Front Panel
Setting Up
q
w
e
r
u
i
o
t
y
!1 !2 !3 !4 !5!0
!6
!7
!8
@1 @2 @3
!9
@5
@6
@7
@8
@9
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
@4@0
Song List
(page 70)
Style List
(page 71)
Display
(page 15)
Voice List
(page 62)
Music
Database List
(page 72)
As illustrated, each note of the keyboard
has a specific note number and name (e.g.,
036/C1), which is used in making various
settings, such as Split Point (page 22).
PSR-E363, YPT-360: 036 (C1) – 096 (C6)
PSR-EW300: 028 (E0) – 103 (G6)
• The illustrations and displays as shown in this manual are based on the PSR-E363.
• Please note that the PSR-EW300, PSR-E363 and YPT-360 have different numbers of keys:
the PSR-EW300 has 76 keys, and the PSR-E363 and YPT-360 have 61 keys.
NOTE
Panel Controls and Terminals
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
11
Setting Up
q [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................page 13
w [MASTER VOLUME] dial ......................page 14
e [DEMO] button......................................page 28
r [METRONOME] button.........................page 16
t [TEMPO/TAP] button ............................page 24
y PART
[L] button ..............................................page 36
[R] button ..............................................page 36
y [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 41
[REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 41
u [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 33
i [PHRASE REPEAT] button...................page 35
o [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button
...............................................................page 36
!0 [A-B REPEAT] button ...........................page 29
!1 [REW] button ........................................page 28
!2 [FF] button ............................................page 28
!3 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 28
!0 [ACMP ON/OFF] button........................page 22
!1 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .................page 24
!2 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....................page 24
!3 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 22
!4 [START/STOP] button...........................page 27
!5 [REC] button .........................................page 41
!6 [SONG] button ......................................page 27
!7 [VOICE] button......................................page 16
!8 [STYLE] button .....................................page 22
!9 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]............page 15
@0 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............page 16
@1 [REVERB] button.......................... pages 18, 44
@2 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 31
@3 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 43
@4 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 45
@5 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 23
@6 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17
@7 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17
@8 [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button..........page 19
@9 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit ....page 16
Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument
assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.”
#0 [SUSTAIN] jack .....................................page 14
#1 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack......................page 14
#2 [AUX IN] jack.........................................page 30
#3 [USB TO HOST] terminal* ....................page 48
* For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Com-
puter-related Operations” (page 8) on the website. When
connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3
meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used.
#4 DC IN jack .............................................page 12
In the Lesson mode
In the Recording mode
In the Song mode
In the Style mode
Panel Setup (Panel Settings)
By using the controls on the panel, you can make various
settings as described here. These settings of the instru-
ment are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel
settings” in this manual.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
Buttons having this indication can be used to call
up an alternate function when the relevant button
is pressed and held. Hold down this button until
the function is called up.
#1 #2 #3
#4
#0
Rear Panel
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
12
Setting Up
Setting Up
Power Requirements
Although the instrument will run either from an AC
adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an
AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is
more environmentally friendly than batteries and
does not deplete resources.
Using an AC Adaptor
Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the
illustration.
Using Batteries
This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/
Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickel-
metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batter-
ies). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH
batteries are recommended for this instrument, since
other types may result in poorer battery performance.
1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off.
2 Open the battery compartment cover located on
the instrument’s bottom panel.
3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow
the polarity markings on the inside of the com-
partment.
4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that
it locks firmly in place.
• Use the specified AC adaptor (page 77) only. Using the
wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument
or overheating.
• When using the AC adaptor with a removable plug, make
sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the
plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.
• If the plug is accidentally removed from the AC adaptor,
slide it back in until it clicks into place, taking care to
avoid touching any internal metal parts. To avoid electric
shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there
is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet
you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or mal-
function occurs, immediately turn the power off and dis-
connect the plug from the outlet.
• Follow the order shown above in reverse when disconnecting
the AC adaptor.
2
1
DC IN jack
(page 11)
AC outlet
AC
adaptor
WARNING
WARNING
Plug
The shape of the plug differs depending on
your area.
Slide the plug as
indicated.
CAUTION
NOTE
• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be
used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instru-
ment.
• Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batter-
ies installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of
data being recorded or transferred at the time.
• Make sure to set the battery type correctly (page 13).
• When battery power becomes too low for proper opera-
tion, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be dis-
torted, and other problems may occur. When this happens,
make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already
recharged ones.
WARNING
NOTICE
Setting Up
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
13
Setting Up
Setting the battery type
Depending on the battery type to be used, you may
need to change the battery type setting on this instru-
ment. Alkaline (and manganese) batteries are cho-
sen by default. After installing new batteries and
turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery
Type appropriately (rechargeable or not) via Function
number 046 (page 47).
Turning the Power On
1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.”
2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the
power on.
The Voice name appears on the display. Adjust
the volume as desired while playing the key-
board.
3 Press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for
about a second to set the instrument to standby
mode.
Setting the Auto Power Off
function
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this
instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is
not operated for a specified period of time. The
amount of time that elapses before the power is
automatically turned off is 30 minutes by default;
however, you can change the setting.
To set the time that elapses before
Auto Power Off is executed:
Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until
“AutoOff” (Function 045; page 47) appears, then use
the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value.
Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes)
Default value: 30 (minutes)
To disable the Auto Power Off function:
Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key
on the keyboard. A message “oFF AutoOff” appears
briefly, then the instrument starts up with the Auto
Power Off function disabled. The Auto Power Off
function also can be disabled by selecting Off in
Function number 045 (page 47).
• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the
specified charger device when charging.
• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an
AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the
instrument.
• Failure to set the battery type may shorten the amount of
the battery life. Make sure to set the battery type correctly.
• Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby sta-
tus, electricity is still flowing to the product at the mini-
mum level. Remove the electric plug from the outlet when
the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of
time, or during electrical storms.
• Press only the [ ] (Standby/On) switch when turning the
power on. Any other operations such as pressing the pedal
are not allowed. Doing so may cause the instrument to
malfunction.
NOTE
NOTICE
CAUTION
NOTICE
• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not
turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified
period of time. Always turn off the power manually when
the instrument is not in use.
• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period
of time while connected to an external device such as an
amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the
instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to
the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-
tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the
power to turn off automatically when a device is con-
nected, disable Auto Power Off.
• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when
the power is turned off with the Auto Power Off function. For
details, see page 49.
PSR-EW300
PSR-E363, YPT-360
The lowest key
NOTICE
NOTE
Setting Up
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
14
Setting Up
Adjusting the Master Volume
To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound,
use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial while playing the
keyboard.
Connecting Headphones or
External Speaker
Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES/
OUTPUT] jack. This jack also functions as an exter-
nal output. By connecting to a computer, keyboard
amplifier, recorder, or other audio device, you can
output the audio signal of this instrument to that
external device. The speakers of this instrument are
automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into
this jack.
Using a Pedal (Sustain)
You can produce a natural sustain as you play by
pressing a footswitch (FC5 or FC4A; sold separately)
plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack.
Using the music rest
Insert the music rest into the slots as shown.
• Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause
permanent hearing loss.
• Do not use the instrument or headphones for a long period
of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this
can cause permanent hearing loss.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-
ponents, turn off the power of all the components. Also,
before turning any components on or off, make sure to set
all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the
components or electrical shock may occur.
• To avoid possible damage to the external device, first turn
on the power to the instrument, then to the external
device. When turning off the power, do so in reverse order:
first turn off the power to the external device, then to the
instrument.
CAUTION
Standard stereo
phone plug
CAUTION
NOTICE
• Plug or unplug the footswitch while the power is off. Also, do
not press the footswitch when turning the power on. Doing so
changes the polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed
operation.
• The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and
style (automatic accompaniment; page 22).
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
15
Setting Up
Display Items and Basic Operations
Display Items
Basic Operations
Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are
used to select items and change values.
Number buttons
Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or
value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes,
the first zeroes can be omitted.
[-] and [+] buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or
press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1.
Press and hold either button to continuously increase
or decrease the value in the corresponding direction.
GrandPno
001
003
These indicate the operating condition
of the instrument.
Song/Voice/Style
Normally this indicates the notes you
play. When the Song Lesson function
is used, this indicates the current
notes and chord of playback. When
the Dictionary function (page 26) is
used, this indicates the notes of the
chord you specify.
Notation
• Any notes occurring below or above
the staff are indicated by “8va.”
• For a few specific chords, not all
notes may be shown, due to space
limitations in the display.
NOTE
This area indicates the Lesson
related status is on.
Keys To Success
(page 33)
Phrase Repeat (page
35)
Chord Progression
(page 40)
Indicates the Passing
Status (page 34) of the
Keys To Success les-
son.
Lesson Indication
Each indication is shown when the
corresponding function is turned on.
...
Auto Accompani-
ment (page 22)
...
Touch Response
(page 18)
... Arpeggio (
page 19
)
... Duo (
page 21
)
... Split (
page 17
)
... Dual (
page 17
)
... Harmony (
page 19
)
On/Off status
Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto
Accompaniment range (page 22) of the keyboard, or
specified via Song playback.
Normally indicates the current measure num-
ber of current Style or Song. When the
[FUNCTION] button (page 45) is in use, this
indicates the Function number.
Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and
chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use.
Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord
or when using the Dictionary function.
Chord
Measure or Function
Keyboard Display
003
027
C3
Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or
target Track of Song recording (page 29, 42).
Lit: Track contains data
Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data
Flashing: Track is selected as recording track
Indicates the current beat of playback.
Song Track status
Beat
The illustration is of the PSR-E363.
Press number but-
tons [0], [0], [3], or
simply press [3].
Example: Selecting Voice 003,
Harpsichord.
Press briefly to
increase.
Press briefly to
decrease.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
16
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument
has a large range of Voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and
percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical sounds.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The Voice number and name will be shown.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
buttons to select the desired Voice.
Refer to the Voice List on page 62.
3
Play the keyboard.
Preset Voice Types
When you want to reset various settings to default
and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTA-
BLE GRAND] button.
The Voice “001 Grand Piano” will automatically be
selected as the Main Voice.
The instrument features a built-in metronome (a
device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for
practicing.
1
Press the [METRONOME] button to start
the metronome.
2
Press the [METRONOME] button again to
stop the metronome.
To change the tempo:
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo
value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to
instantly reset the value to the default tempo.
To set the Time Signature:
Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up
“TimeSigN” (Functions 036; page 47), then use the
number buttons, [+] and [-] buttons.
To set the Metronome Volume:
This can be set via Function number 038 (page 47).
Selecting a Main Voice
001–197 Instrument Voices (including sound effects).
198–215
(Drum Kit)
Various drum and percussion sounds are
assigned to individual keys, from which they
can be played. Details on the instruments and
key assignments of each Drum Kit can be
found in the Drum Kit List on page 67.
216–235
Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by
simply playing the keyboard (page 19).
236–574 XGlite Voices (page 64)
000
One Touch Setting
The One Touch Setting feature automatically
selects the most suitable Voice when you
select a Style or Song (excepting the Song
inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select
Voice number “000” to activate this feature.
GrandPno
001
Voice name
The Voice shown here
becomes the Main
Voice for the instrument.
Voice number
Appears after the
[VOICE] button is
pressed.
Flute
096
Select the Voice you want to play
Playing the “Grand Piano”
Using the Metronome
Tempo
090
Current Tempo value
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
17
Reference
In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a differ-
ent Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”
1
Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.
2
Press the [DUAL] button again to exit
from Dual.
To select a different Dual Voice:
Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suit-
able for the current Main Voice, you can easily select
a different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the
[DUAL] button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 013; page
46), then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,
you can play a different Voice between the Left hand
and Right hand areas.
1
Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split.
The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and
Right hand areas.
You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area
of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and
Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the key-
board.
The highest key for the Left hand area is referred
to as the “Split Point” (Function 007;
page 45
)
which can be changed from the default F#2 key.
2
Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit
from Split.
To select a different Split Voice:
Press and hold the [SPLIT] button to call up “S.Voice”
(Function 017; page 46), then use the number but-
tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Layering a Dual Voice
GrandPno
001
Appears when Dual
is on
Two Voices will
sound at the same
time.
Playing a Split Voice in the Left
Hand area
GrandPno
001
Appears when Split
is on
Split Voice
Main Voice and
Dual Voice
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
18
Reference
The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a
Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically
and expressively control the level of the Voices
according to your playing strength.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until “TouchRes” (Function 008)
appears.
After a few seconds, the current Touch Response
appears.
2
Use the number buttons [1]–[4], [+], [-]
buttons to select a Touch Response set-
ting between 1 and 4.
Touch Response
This instrument can apply various Effects as listed
below to the instrument’s sound.
Reverb
Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the
sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called
up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another
one by the operation below.
To select a Reverb type
1 Press the [REVERB] button.
After “Reverb” (Function 021;
page 46
) is shown
for a few seconds, the current type appears.
2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to
select the desired type.
When “Off” is selected, Reverb is off.
You can also set the Reverb depth via Function number
022 (
page 46
).
Chorus
Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more
spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is
called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can
select another one via Function number 023 (
page
46
). You can also set the Chorus depth for Voices via
Function numbers 012, 016, 020 (page 46).
The Chorus depth cannot be applied to the Styles or
Songs.
Panel Sustain
By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function num-
ber 024 (page 46), you can add a fixed, automatic
sustain to the Main/Dual Voices played on the key-
board. Or, you can produce a natural sustain as
desired with the footswitch (sold separately; page 14).
Changing the Touch Response of
the Keyboard
1Soft
Produces relatively high volume even
with light playing strength. Best for
players with a light touch who want to
maintain a consistent, relatively loud
volume.
2 Medium
Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard
response.
3Hard
The keys must be played very strongly
to generate loud volume. This setting
is best for a wide dynamic range and
optimum expressive control of the
sound, from pianissimo to fortissimo.
4Fixed
All notes are produced at the same
volume no matter how hard the key-
board is played.
TouchRes
Medium
2
008
008
Applying Effects to the Sound
• Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to
which sustain is not applied.
Reverb
Hall2
02
021
021
Current type
NOTE
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
19
Reference
You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Voice
played on the keyboard.
By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply har-
mony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or
echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice.
Also, when the Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios
(broken chords) are automatically played back when
you simply play the appropriate notes on the key-
board. For example, you could play the notes of a
triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the Arpeggio
function will automatically create a variety of interest-
ing phrases. This feature can be used creatively in
music production as well as performance.
1
Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-
ton to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio
function.
When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on,
the most suitable one will be selected for the cur-
rent Main Voice.
If you want to select a specific type, select it by
the operation steps 2 and 3 below.
2
Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO]
button for longer than a second so that
“Harm/Arp” (Functions 028; page 46)
appears on the display.
After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the
current type appears.
3
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
buttons to select the desired type.
When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer
to the Harmony Type list on page 73; to specify
an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list
on page 74.
4
Press a note or notes on the keyboard to
trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio.
When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony
part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for
example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the
played sound of the Main Voice.
Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeg-
gios (broken chords) are automatically played
back when you simply play the appropriate notes
on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase
differs depending on the number of pressed
notes and the area of the keyboard.
5
To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off,
press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-
ton again.
Adding Harmony or Arpeggio
• The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main Voice.
• When selecting a Voice number between 216 and 235,
the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on.
• When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005,
the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand
melody play if you turn on the Style (page 22) and press
chords in the auto accompaniment range of the key-
board.
Analogon
106
GrandPno
001
Appears when the Har-
mony is turned on.
Appears when the
Arpeggio is turned on.
or
NOTE
• When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176,
select the corresponding Voice below as the Main Voice.
143–173: Select a Drum Kit (Voice No.198–207).
174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.” (Voice
No.208).
175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.209) or
“Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.210).
176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.211).
Harm/Arp
Duet
001
028
028
Current type
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTE
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
20
Reference
To adjust the Harmony Volume:
This can be adjusted via Function number 029 (
page
46
).
To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity:
This can be adjusted via Function number 030 (
page
46
).
Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the
Footswitch (Hold)
You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio play-
back continues even after the note has been
released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the
[SUSTAIN] jack.
1
Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of
times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 031)
item appears on the display.
After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the
current setting is shown.
2
Use the number buttons [1]–[3], [+], [-]
buttons to select “Arp Hold.”
If you want to restore the footswitch function to
sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both
hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.”
3
Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio
playback using the footswitch.
Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then
press the footswitch. Even if you release the
notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop
Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch.
How to play the various Types
• Harmony Type 001 to 005
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when
Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22).
• Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill)
Hold down two keys.
• Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo)
Keep holding
down the keys.
• Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo)
Play the keys.
• Arpeggio Type 027 to 176
Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice
and the Dual Voice.
Arpeggio function applies only to the split
Voice.
When Split is off:
When Split is on:
• Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/
Dual Voices simultaneously.
• Selecting a Voice number between 226 and 235 as
the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split auto-
matically.
NOTE
The method of sounding the Harmony effect (01–26)
differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–
05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by
pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of
the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand
side to produce the Harmony effect. For Types 06–26,
turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect.
However, it is necessary to play two notes simultane-
ously for Types 06–12.
Pdl Func
Sustain
1
031
03
1
Arp Hold
2
031
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
21
Reference
Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode)
When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the
instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one per-
son on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in
which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other per-
son watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side.
1
To start this instrument in the Duo
mode, simultaneously hold down the [L]
button and press the [ ] (Standby/On)
switch to turn on the power.
“DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point
and the keyboard is divided into two sections:
one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice.
2
One person should play the left Voice
section of the keyboard while the other
plays the right Voice section.
Selecting a Voice
Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in
“Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16.
How sounds are output in the Duo mode
Notes played in the left Voice section sound from
the left side speaker while notes played in the
right Voice section sound from the right side
speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This out-
put setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut”
setting (Function 027; page 46).
Using sustain in the Duo mode
Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice
sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by
using one of the following methods in the Duo
mode like the usual mode.
• Press the foot switch (page 14) connected to
the [SUSTAIN] jack.
• Set “Sustain” (Function 024; page 46) to on.
Sustain is applied to all notes.
Style Playback in the Duo mode
Although full Style features (accompaniment)
cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part
of a Style can be played back while playing the
left/right Voices normally.
Recording in the Duo mode
The right Voice section and the left Voice section
are recorded on the same track.
3
To exit from the Duo mode, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the
power, and turn the power back on again
normally.
• The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the
keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice).
• In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed from
F
#
3.
• When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 162 to
188, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice.
• Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio
and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode.
DuoMode
on
Equivalent to C3
Split Point:
066 (F#3)
Left Voice
Equivalent to C3
(PSR-E363, YPT-360)
Right Voice
Equivalent to C3
(PSR-EW300)
NOTE
NOTE
• In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteris-
tics of the stereo sound may differ from those in the nor-
mal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate”
(page 46). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference may
be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit features a
different stereo pan position.
• Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left Voice
section and the right Voice section.
• While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is main-
tained even when the power is turned off.
NOTE
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
22
Reference
Playing Styles
This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate
“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of
Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.
1
Press the [STYLE] button, then use the
number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select
the desired Style.
The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in
the Style List (page 71).
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
on the Auto Accompaniment.
With this operation, the area of the keyboard to
the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the
“Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for
specifying the chords.
The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment
range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can
be changed from the default of F#2 via Function
number 007 (page 45).
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
Synchro Start on.
This puts the Style playback in “standby” and
Style starts playing back when you play the key-
board.
4
Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment
range to start playback.
Play a melody with the right hand and chords with
the left hand.
For information about chords, refer to “Chord
Types for Style Playback” (page 25) or use the
Chord Dictionary function (page 26).
5
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
playback.
You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations
to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,
refer to page 24.
Adjusting the Style Volume
To adjust the volume balance between Style play-
back and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume.
This can be set via Function number 001 (page 45).
BritRock
001
Style Name
Style Number
Appears when Style
mode is active.
16Beat
020
This icon appears when automatic
accompaniment is on.
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
Auto
Accompaniment
range
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
To play back the rhythm part only
If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing
the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm
part can be played back, and you can play a melody
performance using the entire keyboard range.
16Beat
020
Flashes when sync start is on.
Split Point
• Since the Pianist category Styles (157–165) have no
rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start
rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make
sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page.
NOTE
Playing Styles
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
23
Reference
If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired
Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music
Database, just selecting the favorite music genre
calls up the ideal settings.
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start
are automatically turned on.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to
select the desired Music Database.
This operation calls up the panel settings such as
Voice and Style that are registered to the
selected Music Database. The category name of
Music Database List is provided on the front
panel, or in the Music Database List (page 72).
3
Play the keyboard as described in Steps
4–5 on page 22.
Style data created on another instrument or com-
puter can be registered (loaded) to Style numbers
166–175, and you can play them just the same as
the internal preset Styles.
1
Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a
computer to this instrument by using
Musicsoft Downloader.
For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Oper-
ations” (page 8) on the website.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until “StyleReg” (Function 009;
page 46) appears.
After about two seconds, a registerable Style file
name will appear in the display.
3
If necessary, select the desired Style by
using the [+] or [-] button.
4
Press the [0] button.
As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 166–
175) appears on the display. If desired, select a
different number using the [+] or [-] button.
5
Press the [0] button.
A confirmation message will appear. To cancel
the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
6
Press the [+/YES] button to actually load
the file.
After a while, a message indicating completion of
the operation appears.
7
Press the [STYLE] button, use the [+] or
[-] button to select a Style from 166–175,
and then try playing it back.
Using the Music Database
Jude Hey
001
Registering a Style File
• The load operation cannot be cancelled during execu-
tion. Never turn off the power during the operation.
Doing so may result in data loss.
StyleReg
009
NOTICE
Playing Styles
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
24
Reference
Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to
vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to
match the song you are playing. These instructions
cover a typical example for using the Sections.
1–3
Same as Steps 1–3 in page 22.
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to
select Main A or Main B.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the
Intro section.
6
Play a chord with your left hand to start
playback of the Intro.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown
below). For information on how to enter chords,
see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page
25.
7
After the Intro finishes, play the key-
board according to the progression of
the Song you are playing.
Play chords with your left hand while playing mel-
odies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/
AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will
change to Fill-in then Main A or B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
The Section switches to the Ending. When the
Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-
cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow
down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-
ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing
back.
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo
value, then use the number buttons, [-] and [+] but-
tons to adjust the Tempo value.
Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset
the value to the default tempo of the current Style or
Song.
Using the Tap function
While a Song or Style is playing back, press the
[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo
to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback
is stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several
times to start playback at the tapped tempo—four
times for a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a
3-beat Song or Style.
Style Variations—Sections
MAIN A
Current Section
INTRO≥A
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
Auto Accompa-
niment range
Changing the Tempo
FILL A≥B
ENDING
Tempo
090
Current Tempo value
Playing Styles
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
25
Reference
For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accom-
paniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musi-
cally, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.
indicates the root note.
• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:
m7, m7
b
5, m7(11), 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2
• Inversions of the 7sus4 chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.
• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.
• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only a specific
part, such as the rhythm, will be played.
Chord Types for Style Playback
Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh
C
Cm
7
C
Cm
7
CM
7
D
Dm
7
D
Dm
7
DM
7
E
Em
7
E
Em
7
EM
7
F
Fm
7
F
Fm
7
FM
7
G
Gm
7
G
Gm
7
GM
7
A
Am
7
A
Am
7
AM
7
B
Bm
7
B
Bm
7
BM
7
Easy Chords
This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers.
For root “C”
To play a major chord
Press the root note ()
of the chord.
To play a minor chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
black key to the left of it.
To play a seventh chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
white key to the left of it.
To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with
the nearest white and black keys
to the left of it (three keys alto-
gether).
C
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
Playing Styles
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
26
Reference
The Dictionary function is useful when you know the
name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn
how to play it.
1
Press and hold the [1 LISTENING
2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer
than a second to call up “Dict.”
“Dict.” will appear in the display.
This operation will divide the entire keyboard into
the three ranges as illustrated below.
• The range to the right of “ ”:
Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces
no sound.
• The range between “ ” and
“”:
Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces
no sound.
• The range to the left of “ ”:
Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified
in the above two ranges.
2
As an example, learn how to play a GM7
(G major seventh) chord.
2-1.
Press the “G” key in the section to the right
of “ ” so that the “G” is shown as the
root note.
2-2.
Press the key labeled “M7” in the section
between “ ” and “ .”
The notes you should play for the specified
chord (root note and chord type) are con-
veniently shown in the display, both as
notation and in the keyboard diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord, press
the [+]/[-] buttons.
3
Following the notation and keyboard dia-
gram in the display, try playing a chord
in the range to the left of “ .”
When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell
sound signals your success and the chord name
in the display flashes.
4
To exit from the Chord Dictionary mode,
press one of these buttons; [SONG],
[VOICE] or [STYLE].
Looking Up Chords Using the
Chord Dictionary
Dict.
Hold for longer
than a second.
Chord Type range Root range Keyboard
playing range
• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually
indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to
C major. However, when specifying major chords here,
make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root
note.
• These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary func-
tion: 6(9), M7(9), M7(
#
11) ,
b
5, M7
b
5, M7aug, m7(11),
mM7(9), mM7
b
5, 7
b
5, sus2
Dict.
001
Dict.
001
Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord
(keyboard)
Notation of
chord
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
27
Reference
Playing Songs
You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of
the functions, such as Lesson.
Song Category
The Songs are organized by category as listed below.
Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo
Songs in sequence.
When Song numbers 001 to 003 are played back in
sequence and the last Song (003) is finished, play-
back will repeat continuously, starting again from the
first Song (001).
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button or the
[START/STOP] button.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then use the
Number buttons to select the desired
Song.
Refer to the Song List (page 70).
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
playback.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
To change the tempo:
Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 24.
Adjusting the Song Volume
To adjust the volume balance between Song play-
back and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume.
This can be set via Function number 002 (page 45).
These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.
Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice
with ease, and another more challenging version.
We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed
down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the
melody of these songs with your right hand.
Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data).
(Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand
first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.)
These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other
instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment.
These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano
pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orches-
tral backing.
Learn how to use expressive “touch” control while playing the keyboard according to the
strength level displayed in the LCD.
Hear and experience the sound of chords and easy chord progressions while playing
the keyboard according to the LCD display indications.
Learn how to play chords with Songs featuring simple, fundamental chord progressions.
Songs (User Songs) you record yourself.
Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 8).
Listening to a Demo Song
• You can select the next or previous Song in order by using the
[+]/[-] buttons after pressing the [DEMO] button. The selection
range is all Songs in the selected Demo Group (Function 043;
page 47).
Selecting and Playing Back a
Song
NOTE
Elise 1
004
Song name
Song number
Appears when Song
mode is active.
Playing Songs
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
28
Reference
With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button
will play back only three internal Demo Songs
repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for
example, all internal Songs automatically play back,
letting you use the instrument as a background
music source.
1
Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer
than a second.
“DemoGrp” (Function 043; page 47) is shown in
the display for a few seconds, followed by the cur-
rent repeat playback target.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select a play-
back group.
3
Press the [DEMO] button to start play-
back.
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again
or press the [START/STOP] button.
Random Song Playback
When the Demo Group (above) is set to something
other than “Demo,” the playback order via the
[DEMO] button can be changed between numerical
order and random order. To do this, press the
[FUNCTION] button several times until “PlayMode”
(Function 044;
page 47
) is called up, then select
“Normal” or “Random.”
Like the transport controls on an audio player, this
instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW)
and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song.
You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other
desired Voice.
1
Select a Song.
2
Select the desired Voice.
3
Press and hold the [VOICE] button for
longer than a second.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display
for a few seconds, and the selected Voice
replaces the Song’s original melody Voice.
BGM Playback
Demo Preset songs (001–003)
Preset All preset songs (001–102)
User All User songs (155–159)
Download
All songs transferred from a computer
(160–)
• When User songs and Download songs data do not exist,
Demo songs are played back.
Hold for longer than
a second.
NOTE
Song Fast Forward, Fast
Reverse, and Pause
• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast
Forward will only work within the range between A and B.
• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song
playback by using the [DEMO] button.
Changing the Melody Voice
• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody
Voice.
• You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song.
Fast Reverse
During playback, press
this button to rapidly
return to an earlier point
in the Song.
Fast Forward
During playback, press this
button to rapidly skip ahead to
a later point in the Song.
Pause
During playback, press
this button to pause play-
back, and press again to
start from that point.
NOTE
NOTE
Playing Songs
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
29
Reference
You can play back only a specific section of a Song
repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B
point (end point) in one-measure increments.
1
Start playback of the Song (page 27).
2
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the start point, press
the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A
point.
3
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the end point, press
the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the
B point.
The specified A-B section of the song will now
play repeatedly.
4
To cancel repeat playback, press the
[A-B REPEAT] button.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-
ton.
As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below),
Songs other than Song numbers 125 to 154 consist
of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individu-
ally by pressing the corresponding button, L or R.
By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off dur-
ing playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned
on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on
the keyboard.
A-B Repeat
• You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is
stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select
the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button
for each point, then start playback.
• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song,
press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback.
• The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select
another Song.
AB
Repeat playback of this section
NOTE
NOTE
Turning Each Part On/Off
• Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the
Parts.
FrereJac
020
010
Lit: Track con-
tains data
Unlit: Track is
muted or con-
tains no data
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
30
Reference
Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers
You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player,
with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you
play the keyboard along with playback of your music player.
1
Turn off the power for both the external
audio device and this instrument.
2
Connect the audio device to the instru-
ment’s [AUX IN] jack.
Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at
one side for connecting to this instrument and the
plug matching the output jack of the external
audio device at the other side.
3
Turn on the external audio device, then
this instrument.
4
Play back the connected external audio
device.
The sound of the audio device is output through
the speakers of this instrument.
5
Adjust the volume balance between the
external audio device and this instrument.
Adjust the audio playback volume on the audio
device, then adjust the entire volume by rotating
the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instru-
ment.
6
Play the keyboard along with the sound
of the audio device.
You can cancel or lower the volume of the melody
part of audio playback. For details, refer to page
31.
7
After finishing the performance, stop
playback of the audio device.
• Before connecting, turn off the power of both this instrument and the external audio device. Also, before turning the power on or
off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent
hearing loss may occur.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to
the external device, and then to the instrument. When turn-
ing off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument,
and then to the external device.
• If you are using a computer or a smart device such as an
iPhone/iPad, you can also connect it to the [USB TO
HOST] terminal (see “Connecting to a Computer” on
page 48).
NOTICE
Audio device (Portable
audio player, etc.)
Stereo-mini
plug
NOTE
• You can adjust the level of the input from the external
audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function num-
ber 003 (page 45) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons.
NOTE
Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
31
Reference
When you output the audio sound of an external
audio device or a computer connected to the [AUX
IN] jack or the [USB TO HOST] terminal through this
instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of
the melody part of audio playback. You can use the
function to practice the melody part along with the
audio playback.
1
Play back audio on the connected exter-
nal device.
2
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton to turn it on.
3
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton again to turn it off.
When the melody or vocal sound may not
be canceled (or lowered) as expected
1
Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR]
button for longer than a second to call
up “SupprPan” (Function 026; page 46)
while the Melody Suppressor function is
turned on.
2
Adjust the pan position of the sound to
be cancelled (lowered) by using the [+],
[-] buttons.
3
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton again to turn it off.
Lowering the volume of a melody
part (Melody Suppressor function)
• When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST]
terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 47, Function 035)
is set to OFF, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be
used.
MelodySP
on
Appears when Melody
Suppressor is on
NOTE
026
C
SupprPan
Hold for longer
than a second.
L63 – C – R63
(Left – Center – Right)
• Depending on the particular music content, the melody
or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if
the Melody Suppressor is turned on.
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
32
Reference
Using the Song Lesson Feature
Use these convenient features to practice the preset Songs and improve your playing
skills. The lessons are arranged for optimum, enjoyable learning, so select the one suit-
able for you, and take your keyboard skills higher, step by step.
You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To
obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/
You can select just the key phrases of the Song—the ones you like most or need to work on—and practice them
one by one. This lesson is ideal for beginning players.
Each Song consists of several Steps. Each time you play all the way through the current Step, your performance
will be evaluated. A score of “60” or more indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step,
which begins automatically.
The passing status
✩ is saved, but you can go on to next Step even when you didn’t pass the Step, or you can
retry the Step later.
You can practice two or more phrases at once repeatedly by speci-
fying them, as desired. This is ideal as a finishing practice before
you try a last (finishing) Step to pass in the Keys to Success mode,
or when you just want to practice the difficult phrase(s) repeatedly.
You can practice the preset Songs in three steps, independently for the right or left hand, or both hands
together. This is ideal when you want to practice all the way through the Song with the selected part.
Lesson 1 (Listening) ....... Listen to the playback part you will play. Remember it as best as you can.
Lesson 2 (Timing) ........... Learn to play the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes,
the correct notes will sound.
Lesson 3 (Waiting) .......... Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing. The Song pauses until
you play the right note.
You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 33) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 36).
If you feel it difficult to play the specific phrase in the Keys to Success lesson, use Listening, Timing or Waiting
lesson to listen to the phrase, to practice only the timing to play, or to let the phrase pause until you play the cor-
rect notes.
The passing status is not shown when the selected lesson playback starts in the Keys to Success mode.
Keys To Success (Page 33)
Select the
Song you want
to learn.
Practice Step 1
Practice
Steps 2, 3, 4...
and so on.
Practice the
last Step.
You’re
done!
Passed
✩✩✩
Passed
✩
Passed
✩✩
Phrase Repeat (Page 35)
Phrase mark
Repeat playback of this section
Listening, Timing and Waiting (Page 36)
Select the Song you
want to learn.
Select the part you
want to work on (right
hand, left hand, both
hands).
Select lesson
1, 2, or 3.
Start the
lesson!
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
33
Reference
To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score
in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To
obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration
at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/
In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in
the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the
entire Song.
1
Prepare the Song Book.
Download the Song Book from the above web-
site, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs
at the end of this manual.
The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are
pre-programmed) will differ depending on the
Song. For details, refer to the Song Book.
2
Press the [SONG] button, then select a
Song for your lesson.
Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the
“LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the cor-
responding page of the Song Book.
3
Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button to
engage this lesson.
The keyboard icon, “Step01” and lesson part (“R”
or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating
that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If
you have already passed several Steps, the next
Step number appears on the display.
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
Lesson.
After the lead-in, playback of the current Step
starts.
5
Practice the phrase in the current Step.
Referring to the notation in the Song Book and
the notes shown on the display, press the notes.
In addition, various learning functions are provided for your enjoyable playing experience as follows:
Touch Tutor (page 38)
Lets you learn how hard or soft to play the keys for more expressive performances.
Chord Study (page 39)
Lets you hear and experience the sound of the chords to use styles efficiently.
Chord Progressions (page 40)
Lets you hear and experience standard chord progressions. Mastering the typical chord progressions in specific
musical genres enables you to play a wider variety of songs with the Style function.
Downloading the Song Book
Keys To Success
• All preset Songs 004 to 102 other than 001–003 and 103–
154 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN
TO PLAY” category Songs.
NOTE
Elise 1
004
• For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is
applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may
be slower than original.
Step01
Appears when Keys to
Success is on
Lesson part
: Right-hand lesson
: Left-hand lesson
: Both-hands lesson
Current Step number
Step01
001
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
34
Reference
6
Confirm the evaluation in the current
Step.
When the current Step reaches the end, your per-
formance will be evaluated and your score (from
0–100) is shown in the display.
A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did
not pass this Step and you should try the same
Step again, which begins automatically. A score
of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step
and you should try the next Step, which begins
automatically.
7
Execute Step 2, 3, 4, and so on.
In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all
the way through the Song. When you pass all
Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automati-
cally be turned off and playback stops.
8
To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO
SUCCESS] button.
Confirming the Passing Status
You can confirm the passing status of each Song
simply by selecting a Song and each Step.
When Step is selected
When Song is selected
Clearing the Passing Status
You can clear existing passing status entries for the
entire Song or a specific Step of the Song.
To clear the passing status entries of all Steps:
Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS
TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds,
with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared”
message will appear on the display.
To clear the passing status entry for a specific
Step:
Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success,
select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS
TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds.
A “Cleared” message will appear on the display.
• If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the
Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the
hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice”
appears in the display.
• Even during lesson, you can select another Step by using
the [+]/[-] buttons.
Excellen
068
Displayed when you’ve
passed the Step.
NOTE
NOTE
• This operation cannot be executed during playback.
Step01
001
✩ : Passed
No information: Not yet passed
Elise 1
004
001
✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet
passed in addition to the last Step
✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed
✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step
✩✩✩ : All Steps passed
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
35
Reference
You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by
selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks pre-
programmed in the Preset Songs (excepting the
Song numbers 001–003, 103–154). You can confirm
the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 8).
Practicing only a single Phrase
During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT]
button at the phrase you want to practice. The corre-
sponding Phrase number will appear in the display
and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn
off the L or R part (page 29), then practice the
phrase which is turned off repeatedly until you are
satisfied.
Even during repeat playback, you can select any
other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you
can return to normal playback by pressing the
[PHRASE REPEAT] button again.
Practicing two or more Phrases
By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B
(as the end point), you can practice two or more
Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback,
press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current
Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the
desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again
to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display,
and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts.
To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button
again.
Phrase Repeat
• Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song
data, which indicates a specific location in the Song.
NOTE
Phrase mark
Repeat playback of this
section
REPEAT
P03
Appears when the Phrase
Repeat function is on
Phrase number
• You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped
by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons.
• Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between
Point A and the end of the Song.
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
36
Reference
Lesson 1—Listening
In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The
model melody/chords of the part you selected will
sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well.
Lesson 2—Timing
In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the
notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong
notes, the correct notes shown in the display will
sound.
Lesson 3—Waiting
In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on
the display. The Song pauses until you play the right
note, and playback tempo will change to match the
speed at which you are playing at.
1
Press the [SONG] button then select a
Song for your lesson.
2
Press either or both the [R] and [L] but-
tons to select the part you want to prac-
tice.
3
Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button to start playback of
the Song Lesson.
Pressing this button repeatedly will change the
Lesson number from 1: LISTENING 2: TIMING
3: WAITING off 1…. Press this button
until the desired number is shown on the display.
4
When Lesson playback reaches to the
end, check your evaluation Grade on the
display.
“2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your per-
formance in four levels.
After the evaluation display has appeared, the
lesson will start again from the beginning.
5
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by
pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Listening, Timing and Waiting
• If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained dur-
ing Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF
via the Function number 041 (page 47).
• The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF
format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 48), but
cannot be applied to the User Songs.
• Songs 125 to 154 are not compatible with the Listening,
Timing and Waiting Lessons.
• In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the
current Song does not contain a left-hand part.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
RightLeft
BothHand
Left-hand
lesson
Right-hand
lesson
Both-hands
lesson
NOTE
• During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by
pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any
time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
• The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting;
page 16) during the Lesson.
• When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key
position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave
units), depending on the selected Voice.
• The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during les-
sons.
NOTE
~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~
~~~~
~~
Excellent!
Very Good!
Good
OK
NOTE
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
37
Reference
Turning the Guide note off
When the “Guide” function is on, you can hear the
Guide note while you are practicing with Lesson 3
(Waiting), and this is ideal when you are not sure of
which keys to play next. The Guide note will sound
slightly behind the timing to indicate the correct note,
when you fail to play the correct note with the correct
timing. When you play the correct note with the cor-
rect timing, the Guide note will not sound and the
playback continues.
If you don’t want to hear the Guide note, turn the
function to off in the following steps.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until “Guide” (Function 042)
appears.
2
Use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the
value “oFF.”
The default value of this function is “on” (Guide
note will sound.)
The Guide function can be used for all preset Songs,
except Songs in categories “FAVORITE WITH
STYLE” (left-hand part) and “CHORD PROGRES-
SION,” and No.79.
Keys to Success with Listening, Timing
or Waiting
You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page
33) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson
(page 36).
1
Enable the Keys to Success lesson.
Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 33.
2
Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-] but-
tons, then press the [1 LISTENING
2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly
to select the desired lesson.
The selected lesson playback starts under the
Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of
the current Step via the selected Lesson. As eval-
uation for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play
key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is
not available.
3
To return to only the Keys to Success
mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button repeatedly until
“StepXX” (XX: number) appears in the
display.
4
To exit from the Lesson mode, press the
[KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.
Phrase Repeat with Listening, Timing
or Waiting
With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTEN-
ING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or
three times to start and use Lesson playback with
Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again sev-
eral times to exit from the Lesson mode stops play-
back and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat
mode.
• The Guide setting cannot be changed during the Lesson
mode.
Guide
042
NOTE
• In this status, the evaluation function is not available.
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
38
Reference
Learning How to Use “Touch” Control
(Touch Tutor)
This learning feature lets you practice how hard or soft to play the keys for musical
expression, referred to as “Touch” in this chapter, by playing back Song numbers 103 to
112 (in the “Touch Tutor” category). Playing back Songs from this category shows indi-
cations for the appropriate playing strength. Try playing according to the level dis-
played in the LCD as the Song progresses.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 103 to
112 in the “Touch Tutor” category by
executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Play-
ing Back a Song” on page 27.
To play with the same Voice that is used in a per-
formance data, select Voice number “000” (OTS;
page 16). After this operation, please make sure
to go back to the Touch Tutor display by pressing
the [SONG] button.
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
3
When the following display appears,
play the notes shown in the display with
the strength level displayed in the LCD.
Play while the strength level is shown.
Your actual playing “Touch” is indicated by “0.”
Try playing so that the indications below appear
(as target values) while you play.
“/” remains or “~” will be shown when your touch
is softer or harder than the target value.
Your touch is harder than the target value
(Target value: medium, your touch: hard)
Your touch is softer than the target value
(Target value: medium, your touch: soft)
4
To stop the playback, press the [START/
STOP] button.
To exit from the Touch Tutor mode, select a Song
from any other category, except “Touch Tutor.”
• Be sure to set the Touch Response parameter (page 18) to a
value other than “Fixed.” When set to “Fixed,” t h e To u c h Tu t o r
function is inactive.
NOTE
TTutor01
103
////////
103
003
Strength level (Target value)
// : Soft
///// : Medium
//////// : Hard
The notes to play are indicated in the
graphic keyboard in the display.
• This function cannot be used with Keys To Success.
00 : Soft
00000 : Medium
00000000 : Hard
00000~~~
Target value: medium
Your touch: hard
00///
Target value: medium
Your touch: soft
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
39
Reference
Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of
the Chords (Chord Study)
You can hear and experience the sound of the chords used in a typical performance by
playing back Song numbers 113 to 124 (in the “Chord Study” category). Song numbers
113 to 119 are very simple songs consisting of a single chord (C, Dm, Em, F, G, Am, Bm;
respectively) played in various positions, letting you listen to and master the chords
one by one. On the other hand, Song numbers 120 to 124 consist of several chords
strung together in a pattern, for experiencing and understanding basic chord progres-
sions. Hear and experience the sound of simple chords and progressions by playing
back these Songs, and play the keyboard while following along with the music notation
and key/chord indications shown in the display.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 113 to
119 in the “CHORD STUDY” category by
executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Play-
ing Back a Song” on page 27.
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
3
Play the keyboard while looking at the
notes shown on the display.
If you feel it difficult to play the notes, use the
Waiting function (page 36) to have the Song
automatically pause until you play the correct
notes. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3
WAITING] button repeatedly until “WAITING”
appears in the display. To exit from the Waiting
function, press the same button again.
4
To stop the playback, press the [START/
STOP] button.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 120 to
124 by pressing the [+]/[-] buttons.
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
3
Play the keyboard while looking at the
notes shown on the display.
Listen to the basic chord progression, and play
along with the Song repeatedly until you can
smoothly perform and play along with the chord
changes.
If you feel it difficult to play the notes, use the
Waiting function (page 36) to have the Song
automatically pause until you play the correct
notes. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3
WAITING] button repeatedly until “WAITING”
appears in the display. To exit from the Waiting
function, press the same button again.
4
To stop the playback, press the [START/
STOP] button.
Hear and experience a sound of
a single chord
• When playing the keyboard while playing back a Song,
you should turn off any parts you don’t intend to have
played back (page 29), to avoid exceeding the maximum
number of simultaneous notes.
ChdStd01
113
003
NOTE
Hear and experience basic
chord progressions
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
40
Reference
Playing Chords along with Chord Progressions of a Song
Song numbers 125 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category are constructed from typi-
cal chord progressions. You can listen to and get a feel for the chord progressions by
playing back the Song and playing the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the
display. The number of keys that are indicated for you to play progress in sequence—
from a single root note, to two notes, then three and four—getting you to gradually and
naturally memorize the chords. Also, you can change the key of the Song, allowing you to
practice the progressions in all keys for full mastery of the chords.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 125 to
154 in the “Chord Progression” category
by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and
Playing Back a Song” on page 27.
2
Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button.
After “CHORD PROGRESSION” scrolls across the
display, the tonic pitch of the selected Song and
the number of the keys to be pressed are shown.
3
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to select the num-
ber of the keys to be played.
Each time the [+] button is pressed, the number
of the keys to press is increased from just one
root note (1Note) to two notes (2Notes), three
notes (3Notes) and four notes (All).
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
5
Play the keyboard looking at the notes
shown on the display.
6
Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button
again to turn the Chord Progression
function off.
To change the key of a Song:
When Chord Progression is on, press one of the
keys in the top octave (C5–B5; indicated to the right
of “ROOT” on the panel, just above the keys) to
change the tonic pitch of the Song.
For example, if you press the key D5 in the Song
of C major, the key changes to D major.
You can practice the playing the chords in combina-
tion with “Waiting” (page 36) of the Lesson function
by simply pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button once.
• The initial key setting is C major or A minor.
• The number of the keys to press can also be set by using
the number buttons [1]–[4].
• When you play the keyboard within the range of C5–B5,
the notes will not sound.
C 1Note
CPg
The tonic pitch of the selected Song: C
The number of the keys
to press: 1
Appears when Chord
Progression is on.
NOTE
C 2Notes
CPg
NOTE
C 1Note
CPg
001
NOTE
• The key of a Song cannot be changed during playback.
The number of the keys to be played
Only one root note (1Note)
Press only the root note of the chord.
Two notes (2Notes)
Press the 3
rd
interval of a chord along with the root
note, and understand the difference between major
chords and minor chords.
Three notes (3Notes)
Press the 5
th
interval of a chord along with the root
note and the 3
rd
.
Four notes (All)
Press all the notes that make up the chord. Very
often, chords are played with just three notes; how-
ever, another interval (such as a 7th) is sometimes
added. Keep in mind that depending on the chord,
there may be no 4
th
note.
Play the chords in combination
with “Waiting” of the Lesson
function
• Even if you play notes in octaves outside of the notes shown on
the display (excluding the range of C5
–
B5, which are used to
change the key of a Song), as well as different inversions of the
chords, the playback will progress.
C
D
b
E
b
F
#
A
b
B
b
DEFGAB
Root range
NOTE
NOTE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
41
Reference
Recording Your Performance
You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers
155–159). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. The
recorded User Song can be played back in the same way as the preset Songs.
You can record your performance to the following two
tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously.
Track 1:
Your melody performance is recorded to this track.
Track 2:
Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord
changes and Section changes), is recorded to this
track.
Recording Data Capacity:
A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord
changes can be recorded to the five User Songs.
The operation is convenient for recording a new
Song without having to specify a track.
1
Make the desired settings such as Voice
and Style settings.
If you want to record only the melody perfor-
mance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to
record Style playback or Rhythm playback as well
as melody performance, turn ACMP on (page 22).
2
Press the [REC] button to enter the
Record Ready mode.
This operation selects the lowest-numbered unre-
corded User Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) as the
recording target, if a User Song has not been
specified in advance or if Record Ready mode has
been entered from the Style mode. If you want to
select another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons.
To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC]
button again to stop flashing on the display.
3
Play the keyboard to start recording.
If ACMP is turned on, you can independently
record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by
pressing the [START/STOP] button then chang-
ing the Section (page 24).
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
recording.
When using a Style, you can stop recording also
by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then
waiting until playback ends.
5
To play back the recorded Song, press
the [START/STOP] button.
Track Structure of a Song
Quick Recording
User 1
EC
001
User Song Number
Flashes
• If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1 (Song
Number 155)” will automatically be selected. In this
case, since you will record over and erase any previ-
ous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you save
your important data to a computer (see page 48).
• ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you
can select another Style in this status by using the
[STYLE] and Number buttons.
• After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown
on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the
power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so
can damage the internal memory and result in a loss
of data.
Limitations while Recording
• You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome
click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings.
• The following settings and buttons are not available,
or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded:
ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus
Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] but-
ton, [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
NOTICE
NOTE
36 48
7260
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
Auto Accompani-
ment range
NOTICE
Recording Your Performance
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
42
Reference
1
Make the desired settings, such as those
of Voice or Style.
If you want to record the melody performance,
turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record
Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 22).
2
While holding down the [REC] button,
press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to
engage the Record mode.
If you want to record Style playback, make sure to
select the Track 2. If you want to record melody
performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as
desired. The illustration below is the example
when selecting Track 2.
The User Song appears on the display.
If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for
example and Track 1 contains already recorded
data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning
on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will deter-
mine whether you listen to a previously recorded
Track or not while recording a new Track.
3
Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the
User Song you want to record.
4
Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 41) in
“Quick Recording.”
1
Press the [SONG] button then select the
desired User Song by using the Number
buttons.
2
Press and hold the [REC] button for lon-
ger than a second.
A confirmation message appears.
To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message appears again.
To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to clear the
Song.
A “Writing!” message appears while the track is
being cleared.
Recording to a Specified Track
001
User 1
EC
User Song
Clearing a User Song
ClrUser1
YES
Hold for longer
than a second.
Sure?
YES
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
43
Reference
Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite
settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be
memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9.
1
Make the desired settings such as those
for Voice and Style.
2
Press and hold down the [REGIST MEM-
ORY] button for longer than a second.
“MemNo.?” appears on the display.
3
Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to mem-
orize the current panel settings.
If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, an “Overwr?” message
appears in the display. To overwrite, press the
[+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO].
1
Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button.
“LoadNo.?” appears on the display.
2
Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call
up the panel settings you memorized.
The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears
in the display.
The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed
by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons.
Memorizing Panel Settings to
the Registration Memory
• If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, the previous data is deleted and
overwritten by the new data.
• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to
the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be
damaged or lost.
MemNo.?
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTICE
Recalling Panel Settings from
the Registration Memory
Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Tempo,
Main A/B
Voice settings
Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings
of the related Functions
Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of
the related Functions
Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of
the related Functions
Effect settings:
Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus
Ty pe
, Voice output, Panel Sustain on/off
Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio
on/off and all settings of the related Functions
Other settings:
Tr a n s p o s e
, Split Point
* When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be
recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style
settings can be recorded or called up.
LoadNo.?
REGIST 1
01
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
44
Reference
Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound
Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when lis-
tening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers,
headphones, or an external speaker system.
1
Hold down the [REVERB] button for lon-
ger than a second to call up “MasterEQ”
(Function 025; page 46).
“MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the current Master EQ type appears.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select the
desired Master EQ type.
Master EQ types
1 Speaker
Optimum for listening via the instru-
ment’s built-in speakers.
2 Headphone
Optimum for headphones, or for lis-
tening via external speakers.
3 Boost Features more powerful sound.
4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.
5 Bright
Lowers the mid range for a brighter
sound.
6 Mild
Lowers the high range for a softer
sound.
MasterEQ
Speaker
1
025
025
Current Master
EQ type
Hold for longer
than a second.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
45
Reference
The Functions
The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters
such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until the desired item appears.
Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the
Function number increases one by one. To
decrease the Function number by one, simulta-
neously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and
press the [-] button briefly. Simply pressing only
the [+] or [-] button does not change the Function
number.
After a few seconds, the Function name may be
replaced with the setting value depending on the
selected Function.
2
Set the value by using the number but-
tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Function List
• The Function number does not appear in the display dur-
ing Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat value
appears instead.
Transpos
005
00
Current value
Function number
Function name
Press several
times as
necessary
NOTE
• To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons;
[SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE].
Direct
numeric entry.
•Increment
value by 1.
•Yes
•On
Press simultaneously
to recall the default
setting.
• Decrement
value by 1.
•No
•Off
NOTE
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Descriptions
Volume
001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100
Determines the volume of the Style while a Style is selected.
(page 22)
002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100
Determines the volume of the Song while a Song is selected.
(page 27)
003
[AUX IN] Audio
Volu me
AuxInVol 000–127 50
Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [AUX IN]
jack (page 30).
004
[USB TO HOST]
Audio Volume
USBINVol 000–127 100
Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal (page 48).
Overall
005 Transpose Transpos -12–12 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.
006 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz
Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in
approx. 0.2Hz increments.
007 Split Point SplitPnt
036–096
(C1–C6;
PSR-E363, YPT-360)/
028–103 (E0–G6;
PSR-EW300)
54 (F#2)
Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split
“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)
and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-
ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.
008 Touch Response TouchRes
1 (Soft),
2 (Medium),
3 (Hard),
4 (Fixed)
2 (Medium) Refer to the page 18.
The Functions
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
46
Reference
Style file
009 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn –
Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded
from computer (page 23).
Main Voice (page 16)
010 Volume M.Volume 000–127 *
Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing
along with a Song or a Style.
011 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
012 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Dual Voice (page 17)
013 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–574 * Selects a Dual Voice.
014 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
015 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
016 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Split Voice (page 17)
017 Split Voice S.Voice 001–574 * Selects a Split Voice.
018 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.
019 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.
020 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Effects
021 Reverb Type Reverb
1–4 (Hall 1–4)
5 (Cathedral)
6–8 (Room 1–3)
9–10 (Stage 1–2)
11–12 (Plate 1–2)
13 (Off)
** Determines the Reverb type, including off (13). (page 75)
022 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64
Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
023 Chorus Type Chorus
1 (Chorus1)
2 (Chorus2)
3 (Chorus3)
4 (Flanger1)
5 (Flanger2)
6 (off)
** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 75)
024 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off.
(page 18)
025 Master EQ Type MasterEQ
1 (Speaker)
2 (Headphone)
3 (Boost)
4 (Piano)
5 (Bright)
6 (Mild)
1 (Speaker)
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output or headphone
output for optimum sound in different listening situations.
(page 44)
026 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 C
Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio
device to be canceled or lowered (page 31).
027 Voice Output VoiceOut
1 (Normal)
2 (Separate)
Split Mode:
1 (Normal)
Duo mode:
2 (Separate)
When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 21)
is on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the perfor-
mance sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from
both the left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the per-
formance sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker,
and the performance sound of the right Voice will sound from the
right speaker.
Harmony/Arpeggio (page 19)
028
Harmony/
Arpeggio Type
Harm/Arp
001–026 (Harmony)
027–176 (Arpeggio)
*
Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is
selected.
029 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.
030 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo
1 (Original)
2 (Thru)
**
Determines the Arpeggio velocity. If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios
will be played back at a volume matching the strength at which
you play the keyboard. If “Original” is selected, arpeggios will be
played back at their original volume regardless of your playing
strength.
031 Pedal Function Pdl Func
1 (Sustain)
2 (Arp Hold)
3 (Hold+Sus)
* Refer to the page 20.
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Descriptions
The Functions
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
47
Reference
* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.
** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio.
MIDI
032 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the inter-
nal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your key-
board performance to the application software on the computer
via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.
033 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal
clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your key-
board performance to the application software on the computer
via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.
034 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO –
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press
[+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should
be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on
the computer.
Audio (page 30)
035 Audio Loop Back
LoopBack
ON/OFF ON
Determines whether Audio sound input from the [USB TO HOST]
terminal is returned to the computer or not with the performance
played on the instrument. If you want to output only the sound
played on this instrument to the computer, set this parameter to
OFF.
Metronome (page 16)
036
Time Signature
Numerator
TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
037
Time Signature
Denominator
TimeSigD
Half note, Quarter
note, Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
** Determines the length of each metronome beat.
038
Metronome
Volu me
MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson (page 32)
039 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 01
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred
from a computer.
Select a Song you want to use for the lessons, select the “R-
Part,” then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to select the
channel you want to play back as the specified right-hand part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part.
040 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The
setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred
from a computer.
Select a Song you want to use for the lessons, select the “L-Part,”
then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to select the chan-
nel you want to play back as the specified left-hand part. We rec-
ommend that you select channel 2 for the left part.
041 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON
This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON,
playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are play-
ing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained
regardless of the speed you are playing at.
042 Guide Guide ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the Guide note sounds (ON) or not (OFF)
during the “Waiting” lesson.
Demo (page 27)
043 Demo Group DemoGrp
1 (Demo)
2 (Preset)
3 (User)
4 (Download)
1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group.
044 Demo Play Mode PlayMode
1 (Normal)
2 (Random)
1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode.
Auto Power Off (page 13)
045
Auto Power Off
Time
AutoOff
OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/
120 (minutes)
30 minutes
Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power
is automatically turned off.
Battery (page 13)
046 Battery Type Battery
1 (Alkaline)
2 (Ni-MH)
1 (Alkaline)
Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument.
Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery
Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings
Default
Value
Descriptions
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
48
Reference
Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad
Connecting the [USB TO HOST] terminal of this
instrument and the computer via a USB cable allows
you to transmit/receive MIDI and Audio data (USB
Audio) to/from the computer. For details on using a
computer with this instrument, refer to the online PDF
manual (page 8) “Computer-related Operations.”
The [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting on this instru-
ment does not affect the signal output to USB Audio.
By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument,
you can take advantage of various functions. For
details on connections, refer to the online PDF man-
ual (page 8) “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” For
information about the compatible smart devices and
application tools, access the following page:
https://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
Connecting to a computer
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0
cables cannot be used.
• If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this
instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 47) to OFF. Oth-
erwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the set-
tings of the computer or the application software.
• If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instru-
ment, you need to register it to this instrument for Style play-
back. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on
page 23.
• Song, Style and keyboard performance data are transmitted
to an external device via MIDI by playing the Song or Style, or
by playing the keyboard. As for Songs, only User Song data
can be transmitted to an external device via MIDI by playing
back the Song.
USB cable
USB
terminal
instrumentcomputer
[USB TO HOST]
terminal
NOTICE
NOTE
NOTE
Files that can be transferred from a computer to
this instrument (and vice versa).
• Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1
Song files created on an external device such as other
instrument or a computer can be transferred between
the computer and this instrument. User Song
recorded on this instrument cannot be transferred to a
computer as a single file, but can be stored as a part
of backup file.
• Style: (.sty)
This instrument doesn’t have a function for creating
Styles. However, Style files created on another instru-
ment or a computer can be transferred to this instru-
ment from the computer. 50KB is the maximum
capacity for one Style file. Style files over this limit are
not shown in the display.
• Backup File*: PSR-E363.BUP (PSR-E363)/
PSREW300.BUP (PSR-EW300)/
YPT-360.BUP (YPT-360)
* Backup parameters (as described in next chapter) other
than “Passing Status of Keys to Success” can be trans-
ferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Down-
loader as a single Backup file.
For details on using a computer with this instrument,
refer to the online PDF manual (page 8) “Computer-
related Operations.”
Connecting an iPhone/iPad
• If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this
instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 47) to OFF. Oth-
erwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the set-
tings of the computer or the application software.
• Files that can be transferred to this instrument is up to
approx. 1.3MB total for Songs and Styles.
NOTE
NOTICE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
49
Reference
Backup and Initialization
The following Backup parameters will be maintained
even if the power is turned off.
Backup parameters other than “Passing Status of
Keys to Success” can be transferred and saved to a
computer as a single Backup file (with the extension:
.BUP). This backup file can be loaded to the instru-
ment for future.
For details on using a computer with this instrument,
refer to the online PDF manual (page 8) “Computer-
related Operations.”
In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the
data (including Style data that have not been loaded)
transferred from the connected computer will be
maintained even if you turn off the power.
You can initialize your original data via the following
two methods.
Backup Clear
This operation initializes the backup parameters.
While holding down the highest white key, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Flash Clear
This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that
have been transferred from a computer. Note that
Style data registered to Style numbers 166–175 will
be maintained. While simultaneously holding the
highest white key and the three highest black keys,
press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power
on.
Backup Parameters
Backup parameters
• User Songs (page 41)
• Style Number 166–175 (page 23)
• Registration Memory (page 43)
• Passing Status of Keys to Success (page 34)
• FUNCTION Settings: (page 45)
Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo,
Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Master EQ type,
Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Battery Type,
Guide, Audio Loop Back
Initialization
• Keep in mind that Backup Clear and Flash Clear also
delete the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the
important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader
(MSD) software.
PSR-EW300
PSR-E363, YPT-360
The highest white key
PSR-EW300
PSR-E363, YPT-360
The highest white key
and the three highest
black keys
NOTICE
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
50
Appendix
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical
power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce
interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away
from the instrument.
Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or
headphones when using the instrument with the
application on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch.
When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is played
or when a song or style is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear
panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 47 Function 032.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard
does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 26), the keys in the right hand
area are used only for entering the chord root and type.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 48 notes—including Dual
voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.
Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.
The harmony doesn’t sound.
The method of sounding the Harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the
selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it
by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then
play some keys in the right-hand side to produce the Harmony effect. For
Types 06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However,
it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.
The Style or Song does not play back when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer
to “Function Settings” on page 47 (Function 033).
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
• Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any
Style-related function.
• The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on.
The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 45 Function 001) is set to an appro-
priate level.
Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing?
Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 45 Function 007).
Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press
the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
• Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-
ment based only on the root.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch
cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug
is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the
actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
• The volume is too soft.
• The sound quality is poor.
• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.
• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play
correctly.
• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new
ones, or use the included AC adaptor.
Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated
(page 13). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in
the Function settings (Function 045; page 47).
When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off
suddenly and unexpectedly.
The protection circuit has been activated due to over current. This may
occur when an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, or an AC
adaptor is damaged. Use the specified adaptor (page 77) only. If it should
appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Troubleshooting
Appendix
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
51
Appendix
MEMO
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
52
Appendix
Song Book Sample
This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).
The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important
points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.
* The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish.
This example introduces part of the English song book.
Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/
Für Elise
Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.
The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.
In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!
First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!
Für Elise With Step Map
.......................................................................12
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” ..................................... 16
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16
First Half Review ...................................................................... 17
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” ....................................18
“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18
“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19
Second Half Review ................................................................... 19
Play the Whole Song! .................................................................19
L. v. Beethoven
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
53
Appendix
Before Playing...
Sit Correctly Finger Numbering
Left Right
3
1
1
5
3
4
4
5
2
2
Sit near the middle of the keyboard.
Reading the Score
The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef
BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDE FGACC
M
i
d
d
l
e
Treble clef
Bass clef
Time Signatures and Counting Time
4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time
3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time
1 octave
2 black keys 3 black keys
Accidentals
(Sharp) Raise a semitone
B
(Flat) Lower a semitone
N
(Natural) Return to normal pitch
Key signature
Clef
Time signature
Notes and Rests
Whole note
Dotted half note
Half note
Dotted quarter note
Quarter note
Eighth note
Sixteenth note
Whole note rest
Dotted half note rest
Half note rest
Dotted quarter note rest
Quarter note rest
Eighth note rest
Sixteenth note rest
1234
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
54
Appendix
Song No.004
Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.
Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as
you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency.
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
With Step Map
From here...
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
55
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
...to here From here...
...to here
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
56
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”
Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand.
We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the
illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get
started!
You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly.
F
i
n
g
e
r
s
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
t
h
i
s
e
x
e
r
c
i
s
e
Right
Tip-toe
ABCD
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
A E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Go back to the beginning and play it again.
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
57
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.
The melody will be built up little by little.
Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.
Short break
Almost done
E
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
58
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”
And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.
It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start.
Don’t play the black keys too strongly.
Left hand
AEAE
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Diligent Practice Time
Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play
smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first
phrase.
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
59
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
OK, let’s begin the second half!
You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs.
It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.
Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.
First Half Review
You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?
Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble
playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.
Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note!
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
60
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
EEE
Jump to the
next E!
And again!
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”
The first note has a staccato dot.
Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note!
Left hand
“EEEEE!”
The only note in this step is E!
Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.
Y
o
u
c
a
n
p
l
a
y
t
h
i
s
w
i
t
h
o
n
l
y
t
h
e
s
e
f
i
n
g
e
r
s
!
Song Book Sample
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
61
Appendix
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Left
Right
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
“Left! Right! Left! Right!”
Play “D
E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.
Have the next hand ready in position to play D
so you won’t have to rush.
Second Half Review
Try playing all the way through the second half.
As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps.
Play the Whole Song!
This is the finishing step!
Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.
Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
62
Appendix
Voice List
Panel Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
1 0 112 1 Grand Piano
2 0 112 2 Bright Piano
3 0 112 7 Harpsichord
4 0 112 4 Honky Tonk Piano
5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano
601133CP80
E.PIANO
7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines
9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano
10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano
11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano
12 0 112 8 Clavi
ORGAN
13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ
14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ
15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1
16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2
17 0 112 19 Rock Organ
18 0 114 19 Purple Organ
19 0 112 18 Click Organ
20 0 116 17 Bright Organ
21 0 127 19 Theater Organ
22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ
23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ
24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ
25 0 112 20 Pipe Organ
26 0 112 21 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion
28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion
29 0 113 24 Bandoneon
30 0 113 23 Modern Harp
31 0 115 23 Harmonica
GUITAR
32 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar
33 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven
34 0 112 25 Classical Guitar
35 0 112 26 Folk Guitar
36 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar
37 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar
38 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar
39 0 112 28 Clean Guitar
40 0 113 27 Octave Guitar
41 0 112 29 Muted Guitar
42 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar
43 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar
BASS
44 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass
45 0 112 34 Finger Bass
46 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass
47 0 112 35 Pick Bass
48 0 112 36 Fretless Bass
49 0 112 37 Slap Bass
50 0 121 40 Funk Bass
51 0 112 39 Synth Bass
52 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass
53 0 113 40 Dance Bass
STRINGS
54 0 112 49 Strings
55 0 112 50 Chamber Strings
56 0 115 50 Marcato Strings
57 0 113 50 Slow Strings
58 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings
59 0 112 51 Synth Strings
60 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings
61 0 112 41 Violin
62 0 112 43 Cello
63 0 112 44 Contrabass
64 0 112 47 Harp
65 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
66 0 112 53 Choir
67 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble
68 0 112 55 Air Choir
69 0 112 54 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
70 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax
71 0 112 67 Tenor Sax
72 0 112 66 Alto Sax
73 0 112 65 Soprano Sax
74 0 112 68 Baritone Sax
75 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
76 0 116 66 Sax Section
77 0 112 72 Clarinet
78 0 112 69 Oboe
79 0 112 70 English Horn
80 0 112 71 Bassoon
TRUMPET
81 0 112 57 Trumpet
82 0 112 58 Trombone
83 0 113 58 Trombone Section
84 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet
85 0 112 61 French Horn
86 0 112 59 Tuba
BRASS
87 0 112 62 Brass Section
88 0 113 62 Big Band Brass
89 0 116 62 Octave Brass
90 0 113 63 80s Brass
91 0 119 62 Mellow Horns
92 0 115 63 Funky Brass
93 0 114 63 Techno Brass
94 0 112 63 Synth Brass
FLUTE
95 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute
96 0 112 74 Flute
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Maximum Polyphony
The instrument has 48-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 48 notes at once,
regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment
uses a number of the available notes, so when auto
accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for
playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same
applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum
polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and
the most recent notes have priority (last note priority).
• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each
voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the
instrument via MIDI from an external device.
• Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.
”
For these cases, it is necessary to subtract 1 from the intended pro-
gram change number to select the appropriate sound, because this
list uses a “1–128” numbering system. For example, to select pro-
gram change number 38 in the list below, transmit program change
number 37.
• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after
the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is
held.
NOTE
Voice List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
63
Appendix
97 0 112 73 Piccolo
98 0 112 76 Pan Flute
99 0 112 75 Recorder
100 0 112 80 Ocarina
SYNTH
101 0 112 81 Square Lead
102 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead
103 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw
104 0 112 88 Under Heim
105 0 112 85 Portatone
106 0 115 82 Analogon
107 0 119 82 Fargo
108 0 112 86 Voice Lead
109 0 121 82 Funky Lead
110 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven
111 0 121 89 Dream Heaven
112 0 113 89 Symbiont
113 0 112 99 Stardust
114 0 112 101 Brightness
115 0 112 92 Xenon Pad
116 0 112 95 Equinox
117 0 112 89 Fantasia
118 0 113 90 Dark Moon
1190113101Bell Pad
120 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad
121 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance
PERCUSSION
122 0 112 12 Vibraphone
123 0 112 13 Marimba
124 0 112 14 Xylophone
125 0 112 115 Steel Drums
126 0 112 9 Celesta
127 0 112 11 Music Box
128 0 112 15 Tubular Bells
129 0 112 48 Timpani
WORLD
130 0 112 106 Banjo
13 1 0 0 111 F id dl e
132 0 0 110 Bagpipe
133 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1
134 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2
135 0 96 16 Cimbalom
136 0 97 16 Santur
137 0 97 108 Kanoon
138 0 98 106 Oud
139 0 96 106 Rabab
1400 0109Kalimba
141 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)
142 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)
143 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)
144 0 114 105 Tanpura
145 0 96 112 Pungi
146 0 117 74 Bansuri
1470 0105Sitar 1
148 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar
149 0 35 105 Sitar 2
150 0 0 112 Shehnai
151 0 97 106 Gopichant
152 0 116 117 Tabla
15 3 0 115 111 E r Hu
154 0 118 74 Di Zi
155 0 116 106 Pi Pa
156 0 113 108 Gu Zheng
157 0 40 47 Yang Qin
158 0 120 111 Morin Khuur
159 0 0 107 Shamisen
1600 0108Koto
161 0 96 108 Taisho-kin
DUAL*
162–––Octave Piano
163 – – – Piano & Strings
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
164 – – – Piano Pad
165 – – – Octave Harpsichord
166 – – – Tiny Electric Piano
167 – – – Electric Piano Pad
168–––Full Organ
169 – – – Octave Jazz Guitar
170–––Octave Strings
171 – – – Orchestra Section
172 – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings
173 – – – Strings Session
174 – – – Brass Tutti
175 – – – Orchestra Tutti
176 – – – Octave French Horns
177–––Octave Harp
178 – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani
179–––Octave Choir
180 – – – Jazz Brass Section
181 – – – Jazz Section
182 – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble
183 – – – Ballroom Brass
184 – – – Flute & Clarinet
185 – – – Trumpet & Trombone
186 – – – Fat Synth Brass
187–––Octave Lead
188 – – – Super 5th Lead
SOUND EFFECTS
1890 0121Fret Noise
190 0 0 122 Breath Noise
191 0 0 123 Seashore
192 0 0 124 Bird Tweet
193 0 0 125 Telephone Ring
194 0 0 126 Helicopter
195 0 0 127 Applause
196 0 113 116 Hand Clap
197 0 0 128 Gunshot
DRUM KITS
198 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1
199 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2
200 127 0 9 Room Kit
201 127 0 17 Rock Kit
202 127 0 25 Electronic Kit
203 127 0 26 Analog Kit
204 127 0 113 Dance Kit
205 127 0 33 Jazz Kit
206 127 0 41 Brush Kit
207 127 0 49 Symphony Kit
208 126 0 128 StdKit 1 + Chinese Perc.
209 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1
210 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2
211 126 0 37 Arabic Kit
212 126 0 41 Cuban Kit
213 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
214 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
215 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit
ARPEGGIO**
216 – – – Concerto
217 – – – Latin Rock
218 – – – Brass Section
219 – – – Piano Ballad
220 – – – Synth Sequence
221 – – – Guitarist
222 – – – Pickin'
223 – – – Spanish
224 – – – Funky Clavi
225 – – – Harpeggio
226 – – – Finger Bass Left
227 – – – Combo Jazz Left
228 – – – Paul's Bass Left
229 – – – Trance Bass Left
230 – – – Acid Bass Left
231 – – – Piano Ballad Left
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
64
Appendix
* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices
sound at the same time.
** Selecting a Voice number between 216 and 235 will turn on
Arpeggio.
XGlite Voice List
232 – – – Salsa Piano Left
233 – – – Piano Arpeggio Left
234 – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left
235 – – – Strum Left
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG PIANO
236 0 0 1 Grand Piano
237 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP
238 0 40 1 Piano Strings
239 0 41 1 Dream
240 0 0 2 Bright Piano
241 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP
242 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano
243 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP
244 0 32 3 Detuned CP80
245 0 0 4 Honky Tonk Piano
246 0 1 4 Honky Tonk Piano KSP
247 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1
248 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP
249 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1
250 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2
251 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP
252 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2
253 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano
254 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1
255 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP
256 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2
257 0 0 8 Clavi
258 0 1 8 Clavi KSP
XG CHROMATIC
259 0 0 9 Celesta
260 0 0 10 Glockenspiel
261 0 0 11 Music Box 1
262 0 64 11 Music Box 2
263 0 0 12 Vibraphone
264 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP
265 0 0 13 Marimba
266 0 1 13 Marimba KSP
267 0 64 13 Sine Marimba
268 0 97 13 Balimba
269 0 98 13 Log Drums
270 0 0 14 Xylophone
271 0 0 15 Tubular Bells
272 0 96 15 Church Bells
273 0 97 15 Carillon
XG ORGAN
274 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1
275 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ
276 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1
277 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2
278 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1
279 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3
280 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ
281 0 64 17 Organ Bass
282 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2
283 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ
284 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2
285 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1
286 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
287 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ
288 0 33 18 Light Organ
289 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2
290 0 0 19 Rock Organ
291 0 64 19 Rotary Organ
292 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ
293 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ
294 0 0 20 Church Organ 1
295 0 32 20 Church Organ 3
296 0 35 20 Church Organ 2
297 0 40 20 Notre Dame
298 0 64 20 Organ Flute
299 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute
300 0 0 21 Reed Organ
301 0 40 21 Puff Organ
302 0 0 22 Accordion
303 0 0 23 Harmonica 1
304 0 32 23 Harmonica 2
305 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1
306 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2
XG GUITAR
307 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1
308 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3
309 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
310 0 96 25 Ukulele
311 0 0 26 Steel Guitar
312 0 35 26 12-string Guitar
313 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar
314 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
315 0 96 26 Mandolin
316 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar
317 0 32 27 Jazz Amp
318 0 0 28 Clean Guitar
319 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar
320 0 0 29 Muted Guitar
321 0 40 29 Funk Guitar
322 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar
323 0 45 29 Jazz Man
324 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar
325 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch
326 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar
327 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1
328 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2
329 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1
330 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback
331 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2
XG BASS
332 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass
333 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm
334 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
335 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1
336 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark
337 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
338 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass
339 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2
340 0 65 34 Modulated Bass
341 0 0 35 Pick Bass
342 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass
343 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1
344 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2
345 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3
346 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4
347 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1
348 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass
349 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2
350 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap
351 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1
352 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass
353 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2
354 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass
355 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
65
Appendix
356 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass
357 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark
358 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass
359 0 41 40 DX Bass
XG STRINGS
360 0 0 41 Violin
361 0 8 41 Slow Violin
362 0 0 42 Viola
363 0 0 43 Cello
364 0 0 44 Contrabass
365 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings
366 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings
367 0 40 45 Suspense Strings
368 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings
369 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp
370 0 0 48 Timpani
XG ENSEMBLE
371 0 0 49 Strings 1
372 0 3 49 Stereo Strings
373 0 8 49 Slow Strings
374 0 35 49 60s Strings
375 0 40 49 Orchestra 1
376 0 41 49 Orchestra 2
377 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra
378 0 45 49 Velocity Strings
379 0 0 50 Strings 2
380 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings
381 0 8 50 Legato Strings
382 0 40 50 Warm Strings
383 0 41 50 Kingdom
384 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1
385 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4
386 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2
387 0 0 53 Choir Aahs
388 0 3 53 Stereo Choir
389 0 32 53 Mellow Choir
390 0 40 53 Choir Strings
391 0 0 54 Voice Oohs
392 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1
393 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2
394 0 41 55 Choral
395 0 64 55 Analog Voice
396 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1
397 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2
398 0 64 56 Impact
XG BRASS
399 0 0 57 Trumpet
400 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet
401 0 0 58 Trombone 1
402 0 18 58 Trombone 2
403 0 0 59 Tuba
404 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet
405 0 0 61 French Horn 1
406 0 6 61 French Horn Solo
407 0 32 61 French Horn 2
408 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra
409 0 0 62 Brass Section
410 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section
411 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1
412 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass
413 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2
414 0 18 64 Soft Brass
415 0 41 64 Choir Brass
XG REED
416 0 0 65 Soprano Sax
417 0 0 66 Alto Sax
418 0 40 66 Sax Section
419 0 0 67 Tenor Sax
420 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
421 0 0 68 Baritone Sax
422 0 0 69 Oboe
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
423 0 0 70 English Horn
424 0 0 71 Bassoon
425 0 0 72 Clarinet
XG PIPE
426 0 0 73 Piccolo
427 0 0 74 Flute
428 0 0 75 Recorder
429 0 0 76 Pan Flute
430 0 0 77 Blown Bottle
431 0 0 79 Whistle
432 0 0 80 Ocarina
XG SYNTH LEAD
433 0 0 81 Square Lead 1
434 0 6 81 Square Lead 2
435 0 8 81 LM Square
436 0 18 81 Hollow
437 0 19 81 Shroud
438 0 64 81 Mellow
439 0 65 81 Solo Sine
440 0 66 81 Sine Lead
441 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1
442 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2
443 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth
444 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth
445 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth
446 0 20 82 Big Lead
447 0 24 82 Heavy Synth
448 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog
449 0 0 83 Calliope Lead
450 0 65 83 Pure Lead
451 0 0 84 Chiff Lead
452 0 0 85 Charang Lead
453 0 64 85 Distorted Lead
454 0 0 86 Voice Lead
455 0 0 87 Fifths Lead
456 0 35 87 Big Five
457 0 0 88 Bass & Lead
458 0 16 88 Big & Low
459 0 64 88 Fat & Perky
460 0 65 88 Soft Whirl
XG SYNTH PAD
461 0 0 89 New Age Pad
462 0 64 89 Fantasy
463 0 0 90 Warm Pad
464 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad
465 0 0 92 Choir Pad
466 0 66 92 Itopia
467 0 0 93 Bowed Pad
468 0 0 94 Metallic Pad
469 0 0 95 Halo Pad
470 0 0 96 Sweep Pad
XG SYNTH EFFECTS
471 0 0 97 Rain
472 0 64 97 Harmo Rain
473 0 65 97 African Wind
474 0 66 97 Carib
475 0 0 98 Sound Track
476 0 27 98 Prologue
477 0 0 99 Crystal
478 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp
479 0 14 99 Popcorn
480 0 18 99 Tiny Bells
481 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel
482 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes
483 0 41 99 Clear Bells
484 0 42 99 Chorus Bells
485 0 65 99 Soft Crystal
486 0 70 99 Air Bells
487 0 71 99 Bell Harp
488 0 72 99 Gamelimba
489 0 0 100 Atmosphere
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
66
Appendix
490 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere
491 0 19 100 Hollow Release
492 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano
493 0 64 100 Nylon Harp
494 0 65 100 Harp Vox
495 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad
496 0 0 101 Brightness
497 0 0 102 Goblins
498 0 64 102 Goblins Synth
499 0 65 102 Creeper
500 0 67 102 Ritual
501 0 68 102 To Heaven
502 0 70 102 Night
503 0 71 102 Glisten
504 0 96 102 Bell Choir
505 0 0 103 Echoes
506 0 65 103 Big Pan
507 0 0 104 Sci-Fi
XG WORLD
508 0 0 78 Shakuhachi
509 0 97 105 Tamboura
510 0 0 106 Banjo
511 0 28 106 Muted Banjo
XG PERCUSSIVE
512 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell
513 0 96 113 Bonang
514 0 97 113 Altair
515 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs
516 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
517 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal
518 0 0 114 Agogo
519 0 0 115 Steel Drums
520 0 97 115 Glass Percussion
521 0 98 115 Thai Bells
522 0 0 116 Woodblock
523 0 96 116 Castanets
524 0 0 117 Taiko Drum
525 0 96 117 Gran Cassa
526 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1
527 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2
528 0 65 118 Real Tom
529 0 66 118 Rock Tom
530 0 0 119 Synth Drum
531 0 64 119 Analog Tom
532 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion
533 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal
XG SOUND EFFECTS
534 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 1
535 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2
536 64 0 4 String Slap
537 64 0 17 Flute Key Click
538 64 0 33 Shower
539 64 0 34 Thunder
540 64 0 35 Wind
541 64 0 36 Stream
542 64 0 37 Bubble
543 64 0 38 Feed
544 64 0 49 Dog
545 64 0 50 Horse
546 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2
547 64 0 56 Maou
548 64 0 65 Phone Call
549 64 0 66 Door Squeak
550 64 0 67 Door Slam
551 64 0 68 Scratch Cut
552 64 0 69 Scratch Split
553 64 0 70 Wind Chime
554 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2
555 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition
556 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal
557 64 0 83 Car Passing
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
558 64 0 84 Car Crash
559 64 0 85 Siren
560 64 0 86 Train
561 64 0 87 Jet Plane
562 64 0 88 Starship
563 64 0 89 Burst
564 64 0 90 Roller Coaster
565 64 0 91 Submarine
566 64 0 97 Laugh
567 64 0 98 Scream
568 64 0 99 Punch
569 64 0 100 Heartbeat
570 64 0 101 Footsteps
571 64 0 113 Machine Gun
572 64 0 114 Laser Gun
573 64 0 115 Explosion
574 64 0 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
67
Appendix
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1.”
• Each percussion voice uses one-note polyphony.
• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than
keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “Standard Kit 1,” the “Seq
Click H” (Note #36/Note C1) corresponds to MIDI (Note #24/Note C0).
Voice No. 198 199 200 201 202 203
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note # Note Note # Note
25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2
Snare Noisy Snare Snappy Electronic Snare Noisy 4
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Analog L
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2
Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog H
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick
Side Stick Analog
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog 1
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight 2 Snare Room H Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L
Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electronic 1 Tom Analog 1
54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 1
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H
Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electronic 2 Tom Analog 2
56 G# 244G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom
Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electronic 3 Tom Analog 3
58 A# 246A# 1 Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Analog
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L
Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electronic 4 Tom Analog 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H
Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electronic 5 Tom Analog 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Analog
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom
Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electronic 6 Tom Analog 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2
83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch H Scratch H
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
Scratch L Scratch L
92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
Drum Kit List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
68
Appendix
Voice No. 198 204 205 206 207 208
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/128
Keyboard MIDI
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit
StdKit 1 +
Chinese Perc.
Note #NoteNote #Note
25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Brush Slap 2
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Kick Techno Q Bass Drum Soft L
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Kick Techno L Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Kick Techno Bass Drum Jazz Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Mute
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare 1
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap Band Snare 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1
54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2
56 G# 244G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3
58 A# 246A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal 1
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal 1 Short
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Short
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Dagu Mute
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
Zhongcha Mute
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
Dagu Heavy
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2
Zhongcha Open
83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H
Paigu Middle
84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L
Paigu Low
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
Xiaocha Mute
86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long
Bangu
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
Xiaocha Open
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
Bangzi
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
Muyu Low
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H
Zhongluo Mute
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L
Muyu Mid-Low
92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute
Zhongluo Open
93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open
Muyu Middle
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
Xiaoluo Open
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
Triangle Mute
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
Triangle Open
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
69
Appendix
* Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list.
209 210 211 212 213 214 215
126/000/040 126/000/115 126/000/037 126/000/041 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/113
Indian Kit 1 Indian Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit
Zarb Back mf
Zarb Tom f
Indian Hand Clap Zarb Eshareh
Dafli Open Zarb Whipping
Dafli Slap Tombak Tom f
Dafli Rim Neghareh Tom f
Duff Open Tombak Back f
Duff Slap Neghareh Back f
Duff Rim Tombak Snap f
Hateli Long Hatheli Long Neghareh Pelang f Conga H Tip
Hateli Short Hatheli Short Tombak Trill Conga H Heel
Baya ge Baya ge Khaligi Clap 1 Conga H Open
Drum Loop
Baya ke Baya ke Arabic Zalgouta Open Conga H Mute
Baya ghe Baya ghe Khaligi Clap 2 Conga H Slap Open
Baya ka Baya ka Arabic Zalgouta Close Conga H Slap
Tabla na Tabla na Arabic Hand Clap Conga H Slap Mute
Tabla tin Tabla tin Tabel Tak 1 Conga L Tip
Tablabaya dha Tablabaya dha Sagat 1 Conga L Heel
Tabla tun Dhol 1 Open Tabel Dom Conga L Open
Tablabaya dhin Dhol 1 Slap Sagat 2 Conga L Mute
Tabla di Dhol 1 Mute Tabel Tak 2 Conga L Slap Open
Tablabaya dhe Dhol 1 Open Slap Sagat 3 Conga L Slap
Tabla ti Dhol 1 Roll Riq Tik 3 Conga L Slide
Tabla ne Dandia Short Riq Tik 2 Bongo H Open 1 finger Cutting Noise 1 Phone Call Heartbeat
Tabla taran Dandia Long Riq Tik Hard 1 Bongo H Open 3 finger Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps
Tabla tak Chutki Riq Tik 1 Bongo H Rim Door Slam Door Squeak
Chipri Chipri Riq Tik Hard 2 Bongo H Tip String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam
Kanjira Open Khanjira Open Riq Tik Hard 3 Bongo H Heel Scratch Applause
Kanjira Slap Khanjira Slap Riq Tish Bongo H Slap Wind Chime Camera
Kanjira Mute Khanjira Mute Riq Snouj 2 Bongo L Open 1 finger Telephone Ring Horn
Kanjira Bend up Khanjira Bendup Riq Roll Bongo L Open 3 finger Hiccup
Kanjira Bend down Khanjira Benddown Riq Snouj 1 Bongo L Rim Cuckoo Clock
Dholak Open Dholak 1 Open Riq Sak Bongo L Tip Stream
Dholak Mute Dholak 1 Mute Riq Snouj 3 Bongo L Heel Frog
Dholak Slap Dholak 1 Slap Riq Snouj 4 Bongo L Slap Rooster
Dhol Open Dhol 2 Open Riq Tak 1 Timbale L Open Dog
Dhol Mute Dhol 2 Slap Riq Brass 1 Cat
Dhol Slap Dhol 2 Rim Riq Tak 2 Owl
Dhol Slide Mridangam na Riq Brass 2 Horse Gallop
Mridangam Normal Mridangam din Riq Dom Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh
Mridangam Open Mridangam ki Katem Tak Doff Paila L Car Tires Squeal Cow
Mridangam Mute Mridangam ta Katem Dom Timbale H Open Car Passing Lion
Mridangam Slap Mridangam Chapu Katem Sak 1 Car Crash Scratch
Mridangam Rim Mridangam Lo Closed Katem Tak 1 Siren Yo!
Chimta Open Mridangam Lo Open Katem Sak 2 Train Go!
Chimta Normal Chimta Normal Katem Tak 2 Jet Plane Get up!
Chimta Ring Chimta Ring Daholla Sak 2 Paila H Starship Whoow!
Dholki Open Dholki Hi Open Daholla Sak 1 Cowbell Top Burst
Huuaah!
Dholki Mute Dholki Hi Mute Daholla Tak 1 Roller Coaster
Dholki Slap Dholki Lo Open Daholla Dom Submarine
Dholki Slide Dholki Hi Slap Daholla Tak 2
Dholki Rim Dholki Lo Slide Tablah Prok Guiro Short
Khol Open Khol Open Tablah Dom 2 Guiro Long
Khol Slide Khol Slide Tablah Roll of Edge
Khol Mute Khol Mute Tablah Tak Finger 4
Manjira Open Manjira Open Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tambourine Shower Laugh
Manjira Close Manjira Close Tablah Tak Finger 3 Thunder Scream
Jhanji Open Jhanji Open Tablah Tak Trill 2 Wind Punch
Jhanji Close Jhanji Close Tablah Tak Finger 2 Stream Heartbeat
Mondira Open Mondira Open Tablah Tak Finger 1 Maracas Bubble Footsteps
Uh!+Hit
Mondira Close Mondira Close Tablah Tik 2 Shaker Feed
Mridang Open Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Tablah Tik 4 Cabasa
Mridang Mute Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Tablah Tik 3
Mridang Rim Indian Bhangra Scat 3 Tablah Tik 1
Mridang Slide Indian Bhangra Scat 4 Tablah Tak 3
Khomokh Normal Khomokh Normal Tablah Tak 1
Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mute Tablah Tak 4
Khomokh Mltatk Khomokh Mltatk Tablah Tak 2
Madal-A2 Thavil Open Tablah Sak 2
Madal-A#2 Thavil Slap Tablah Tremolo
Madal-B2 Thavil Mute Tablah Sak 1
Madal-C3 Khartaal Tablah Dom 1 Dog Machine Gun
Madal-C#3 Dholak 2 Open Horse Laser Gun Applause 1
Madal-D3 Dholak 2 Slide Bird Tweet Explosion Applause 2
Madal-D#3 Dholak 2 Rim 1 Firework Applause 3
Madal-E3 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Applause 4
Madal-F3 Dholak 2 Ring
Madal-F#3 Dholak 2 Slap
Madal-G3 Maou
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
70
Appendix
Song List
• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and
may not be exactly the same as the original.
• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes
scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song
Book, complete the user registration at the following website.
https://member.yamaha.com/
Song No. Song Name
Top Picks
001 Demo 1 (Yamaha Original)
002 Demo 2 (Yamaha Original)
003 Demo 3 (Yamaha Original)
Learn to Play
004 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
005 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
006 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)
007 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)
008 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)
009 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)
010 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
011 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
012 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)
013 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)
014 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)
015 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)
016 The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional)
017 The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional)
018 Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional)
019 Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional)
Favorite
020 Frère Jacques (Traditional)
021 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)
022 Aura Lee (Traditional)
023 London Bridge (Traditional)
024 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)
025 Nedelka (Traditional)
026 Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)
027 Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional)
028 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)
029 Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional)
030 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)
031 Santa Lucia (A. Longo)
032 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)
033 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)
034 Greensleeves (Traditional)
035 Kalinka (Traditional)
036 Holdilia Cook (Traditional)
037 Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)
038 La Cucaracha (Traditional)
039 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)
040 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)
041 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)
042 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)
043 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)
044 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)
045 Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst)
046 The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin)
047 Die Moldau (B. Smetana)
048 Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar)
049 Humoresques (A. Dvořák)
050
Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement)
(A. Dvořák)
Favorite with Style
051 O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)
052 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)
053 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball)
054 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)
055 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)
056 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)
057 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)
058 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)
059 Red River Valley (Traditional)
060 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)
061 Muffin Man (R. A. King)
062 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)
063 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)
064 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)
065 When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional)
066 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)
067 Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional)
068 I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional)
069 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)
070 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)
Instrument Master
071 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)
072 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
073 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)
074 Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
075 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)
076 Romance de Amor (Traditional)
077 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)
078 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)
079 Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I)
Piano Repertoire
080 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)
081 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)
082 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)
083 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)
084 My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional)
085 Loch Lomond (Traditional)
086 Silent Night (F. Gruber)
087 Deck the Halls (Traditional)
088 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)
089
Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven)
090
Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod)
091 Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach)
092 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)
093 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)
094 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)
095 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)
096 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)
097 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)
098 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)
099 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)
100 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)
101 Annie Laurie (Traditional)
102 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster)
Song No. Special Appendix
Touch Tutor
103–112 TTutor01–TTutor10
Chord Study
113–124 ChdStd01–ChdStd12
Chord Progression
125–154 Maj1234–min1476
Song No. Song Name
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
71
Appendix
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
1 BritPopRock
2 8BeatModern
3 Cool8Beat
4 Happy8Beat
5 Shake8Beat
6 ContemporaryRock
7StadiumRock
8 70sRock
9 HardRock 1
10 60sGuitarPop
11 8BeatAdria
12 60s8Beat
13 8Beat
14 OffBeat
15 Folkrock
16 60sRock
17 HardRock 2
18 RockShuffle
19 8BeatRock
16BEAT
20 16Beat
21 PopShuffle
22 GuitarPop
23 16BeatUptempo
24 KoolShuffle
25 HipHopLight
BALLAD
26 70sGlamPiano
27 PianoBallad
28 LoveSong
29 6/8ModernEP
30 6/8SlowRock
31 OrganBallad
32 PopBallad
33 16BeatBallad
DANCE
34 ClubBeat
35 Electronica
36 FunkyHouse
37 RetroClub
38 USHipHop
39 MellowHipHop
40 Chillout
41 EuroTrance
42 Ibiza
43 SwingHouse
44 Clubdance
45 ClubLatin
46 Garage 1
47 Garage 2
48 TechnoParty
49 UKPop
50 HipHopGroove
51 HipShuffle
52 HipHopPop
DISCO
53 ModernDisco
54 70sDisco
55 LatinDisco
56 SaturdayNight
57 DiscoHands
SWING&JAZZ
58 BigBandFast
59 BigBandBallad
60 AcousticJazz
61 AcidJazz
62 JazzClub
63 Swing 1
64 Swing 2
65 Five/Four
66 Dixieland
67 Ragtime
R&B
68 BluesRock
69 Soul
70 DetroitPop
71 60sRock&Roll
72 6/8Soul
73 CrocoTwist
74 Rock &Roll
75 ComboBoogie
76 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
77 CountryPop
78 CountrySwing
79 Country2/4
80 Bluegrass
LATIN
81 BrazilianSamba
82 BossaNova
83 Forro
84 Sertanejo 1
85 Sertanejo 2
86 Baião
87 Vallenato
88 Joropo
89 Parranda
90 Merengue
91 Reggaeton
92 Tijuana
93 PasoDuranguense
94 CumbiaGrupera
95 BaladaBanda
96 MexicanMambo
97 Mambo
98 Salsa
99 Beguine
100 Reggae
WORLD
101 ScottishReel
102 4/4Standart
103 Rumba2/4
104 Saeidy
105 WehdaSaghira
106 IranianElec
107 Emarati
108 AfricanGospelReggae
109 HighLife
110 AfricanGospel
Style No. Style Name
111 IndianPop
112 Bhangra
113 B ha jan
114 B ol ly Mi x
115 Ta mi l
116 Kerala
117 GoanPop
118 Rajasthan
119 Dandiya
120 Qawwali
121 FolkHills
122 ModernDangdut
123 Keroncong
124 XiQingLuoGu
125 YiZuMinGe
126 JingJuJieZou
BALLROOM
127 VienneseWaltz
128 EnglishWaltz
129 Slowfox
130 Foxtrot
131 Quickstep
132 Tango
133 Pasodoble
134 Samba
135 ChaChaCha
136 Rumba
137 Jive
TRADITIONAL
138 US March
139 6/8March
140 GermanMarch
141 PolkaPop
142 OberkrainerPolka
143 Tarantella
144 Showtune
145 ChristmasSwing
146 ChristmasWaltz
WALTZ
147 ItalianWaltz
148 SwingWaltz
149 JazzWaltz
150 ValsMexicano
151 CountryWaltz
152 OberkrainerWalzer
153 Musette
CHILDREN
154 Learning2/4
155 Learning4/4
156 Learning6/8
PIANIST
157 Stride
158 PianoSwing
159 PianoBoogie
160 Arpeggio
161 Habanera
162 SlowRock
163 8BeatPianoBallad
164 6/8PianoMarch
165 PianoWaltz
Style No. Style Name
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
72
Appendix
Music Database List
MDB No. MDB Name
ALL TIME HITS
1 Jude Hey
2 Jumping
3 WrldRock
4 All OK
5 YourTune
6USASurf
7JustCall
8 Get home
9 GtrWheel
10 IWasBorn
11 Sailing
12 BluJeans
13 Holiday
14 Imagine
15 Marriage
16 WiteShde
17 NowNever
18 Hard Day
19 USA Pie
20 Norway
21 YesterBd
22 A Magic
POP & ROCK
23 Cheerful
24 SwftShke
25 Watches
26 PrtTmLvr
27 S Party
28 MoonShdw
29 NikitSng
30 GirlsMne
31 Radio
32 Attempt
33 OnAStrng
34 WhatWant
35 ThankFor
36 Tmbourin
37 RubyGirl
38 TopWorld
39 TeachSng
40 EachMin
41 ShakenUp
42 CrocRock
43 HurryLov
44 Champion
45 Jailhous
46 Rock&Rll
47 HonkyTnk
48 JustU&Me
49 LveSmile
50 Wish I
BALLAD
51 Red Lady
52 IvoryAnd
53 TheWorld
54 Paradise
55 Whisper
56 Woman
57 CndleWnd
58 FlyAway
59 LoveYou
60 SavingAl
61 InTheDrk
62 SayYou
63 ThisWay
64 Inspirng
OLDIES
65 Diana’s
66 Tonight
67 SandLter
68 NoRain
69 Ghetto
70 PrettyWm
71 Sherry
72 Sally’s
DANCE & DISCO
73 FevrNite
74 StyAlive
75 Westerly
76 Run Free
77 DISCO
78 JoelLife
79 Coupled
80 SingBack
81 Janeiro
82 BoomRoom
83 DontHide
84 RewCraig
85 LondonRU
86 WerUBeen
87 MkeMusic
88 10,2 Sun
89 Believe
90 MarieClb
SWING & JAZZ
91 MoonOf
92 Patrol
93 Rhythm
94 CatSwing
95 Misbehav
96 Safari
97 SoWhatIs
98 TimeGone
99 TasteHny
100 TwoFoot
101 Blk&Whte
102 EnterRag
103 TakeFour
104 Birdland
105 MistyFln
COUNTRY
106 OnTheRd
107 BlueSong
108 InMyMind
109 ContryHw
MDB No. MDB Name
110 GreenGrs
111 EverNeed
112 Lucille
113 Tennesse
LATIN
114 B ra si l
115 C hr y Pi nk
116 MyShadow
117 BosaWave
118 D nt Wo rr y
119 JelsTngo
120 I'mPola
121 MamboJm
122 OneNote
123 PasoCani
124 Beguine
125 Tijuana
126 Puntuali
127 Cielito
128 The Liar
129 Unfrgivn
ENTERTAINMENT
130 Raindrop
131 Califrag
132 CatMemry
133 MyPrince
134 NoBuiz
135 JinglBel
136 SilentNt
137 Christms
138 Favorite
139 RedRdolf
140 MoonWlz
141 AroundWd
WALTZ & TRAD
142 DadClock
143 RockBaby
144 SomeLara
145 Doodah!
146 Dreamer
147 Birthday
148 Sunshine
149 TexRose
150 ThePolka
151 Yankee’s
152 DanubeWz
153 D'amor
154 Reine de
155 MnchHaus
156 Comrades
157 VanMass
158 ClariPka
MDB No. MDB Name
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
73
Appendix
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
No. Harmony Type Description
001 Duet
If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point
while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two
or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song
that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.
002 Trio
003 Block
004 Country
005 Octave
006 Trill 1/4 note
If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill)
continuously.
(The trill speed differs depending on the selected type.)
007 Trill 1/6 note
008 Trill 1/8 note
009 Trill 1/12 note
010 Trill 1/16 note
011 Trill 1/24 note
012 Trill 1/32 note
013 Tremolo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a note, the note is repeated continuously.
(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)
014 Tremolo 1/6 note
015 Tremolo 1/8 note
016 Tremo lo 1/12 note
017 Tremo lo 1/16 note
018 Tremolo 1/24 note
019 Tremolo 1/32 note
020 Echo 1/4 note
If you play a note, echo is applied to the note played.
(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)
021 Echo 1/6 note
022 Echo 1/8 note
023 Echo 1/12 note
024 Echo 1/16 note
025 Echo 1/24 note
026 Echo 1/32 note
Effect Type List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
74
Appendix
Arpeggio Type List
• When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143
to 176, select the corresponding Voice below
as the Main Voice.
143–173: Select a Drum Kit (Voice No.198–
207).
174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese
Perc.” (Voice No.208).
175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice
No.209) or “Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.210).
176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice
No.211).
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
027 UpOct
028 DownOct
029 UpDwnOct
030 SynArp1
031 SynArp2
032 SynArp3
033 SynArp4
034 SyncEcho
035 PulsLine
036 StepLine
037 Random
038 Down&Up
039 SuperArp
040 AcidLine
041 TekEcho
042 VelGruv
043 Planet
044 Trance1
045 Trance2
046 Trance3
047 ChordAlt
048 SynChrd1
049 SynChrd2
050 Syncopa
051 Hybrid1
052 Hybrid2
053 Hybrid3
054 Hybrid4
055 Hybrid5
056 PfArp1
057 PfArp2
058 PfArp3
059 PfArp4
060 PfClub1
061 PfClub2
062 PfBallad
063 PfChd8th
064 EPArp
065 PfShufle
066 PfRock
067 Clavi1
068 Clavi2
069 RocknPf
070 70RockPf
071 SlowflPf
072 SoulPf
073 ChordUp
074 ChdDance
075 LatinRck
076 Salsa1
077 Salsa2
078 Reggae1
079 Reggae2
080 Reggae3
081 6/8R&B
082 Gospel
083 BalladEP
084 Strum1
085 Strum2
086 Strum3
087 Strum4
088 Pickin1
089 Pickin2
090 Funky
091 GtrChrd1
092 GtrChrd2
093 GtrChrd3
094 GtrArp
095 FngrPck1
096 FngrPck2
097 CleanGtr
098 Slowfl
099 Samba1
100 Samba2
101 Spanish1
102 Spanish2
103 Harp1
104 Harp2
105 FngrBas1
106 FngrBas2
107 FngrBas3
108 CoolFunk
109 SlapBass
110 AcidBas1
111 AcidBas2
112 FunkyBas
113 C mbJa zB 1
114 C mbJa zB 2
115 C mbJa zB 3
116 NewR&BBs
117 HipHopBs
118 S moo th Bs
119 D re am Bas
120 TranceBs
121 LatinBas
122 Strings1
123 Strings2
124 Strings3
125 Strings4
126 StrngDwn
127 StrngUp
128 OrcheStr
129 Jupiter
130 Pizz1
131 Pizz2
132 BrasSec1
133 BrasSec2
134 BrasSec3
135 FunkBras
136 SoulReed
137 DiscoLd
138 SmoothPd
139 PercArp
140 Ethnic
141 Cresendo
142 DiscoCP
143 Perc1
144 Perc2
145 R&B
146 Funk1
147 Funk2
148 Funk3
149 Soul
150 ClscHip
151 Smooth
152 NewGospl
153 CmbJazz1
154 CmbJazz2
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
155 Bebop
156 JazzHop
157 FolkRock
158 Unpluggd
159 HipHop
160 Trance
161 Dream
162 2 Step
163 ClubHs1
164 ClubHs2
165 EuroTek
166 House
167 Ibiza1
168 Ibiza2
169 Ibiza3
170 Garage
171 Samba
172 African
173 Latin
174 China
175 Indian
176 Arabic
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
Effect Type List
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
75
Appendix
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Reverb Type Description
01–04 Hall 1–4 Concert hall reverb.
05 Cathedral Rich reverb simulating the acoustics of a cathedral. Good for pipe organ sounds.
06–08 Room 1–3 Small room reverb.
09–10 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
11–12 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
13 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
1–3 Chorus 1–3 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
4–5 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.
6 Off No effect.
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
76
Appendix
Specifications
PSR-E363, YPT-360 PSR-EW300
Product Name Digital Keyboard
Size/Weight
Dimensions (W x D x H)
945mm x 369mm x 118mm
(37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-5/8”)
1152mm x 369mm x 118mm
(45-3/8” x 14-1/2” x 4-5/8”)
Weight
4.6kg (10 lbs 2 oz.)
(not including batteries)
6.2kg (13 lbs 11 oz.)
(not including batteries)
Control Interface
Keyboard
Number of Keys 61 76
Touch Response Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed
Display
Type LCD
Backlight Yes
Language English
Panel Language English
Voices
Tone Generation
Tone Generation
Technology
AWM Stereo Sampling
Polyphony (max.) 48
Preset Number of Voices
574
(197 Panel Voices + 18 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio +
339 XGlite Voices)
Compatibility GM/XGlite
Effects
Types
Reverb 12 types
Chorus 5 types
Master EQ 6 types
Functions
Dual Yes
Split Yes
Panel Sustain Yes
Harmony 26 types
Arpeggio 150 types
Melody Suppressor Yes
Accompaniment
Styles
Preset
Number of Styles 165
Fingering Multi finger
Style Control
ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,
MAIN/AUTO FILL
External Styles 10
Other Features
Music Database 158
One Touch Setting
(OTS)
Ye s
Compatibility Style File Format (SFF)
Songs (MIDI)
Preset Number of Preset Songs
154
(including Touch Tutor: 10, Chord Study: 12, Chord Progression: 30)
Recording
Number of Songs 5
Number of Tracks 2
Data Capacity Approx. 10,000 notes
Format
Playback SMF Formats 0 & 1
Recording Original File Format
Functions
Lesson
KEYS TO SUCCESS, Lesson 1–3 (Listening, Timing, Waiting),
Phrase Repeat, A-B Repeat, Chord Dictionary, Touch Tutor,
Chord Study, Chord Progression
USB Audio (USB TO HOST) 44.1kHz, 16bit, stereo
Registration
Memory
Number of Buttons 9
Overall Controls
Metronome Yes
Tempo Range 11–280
Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12
Tuning 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)
Duo Yes
Miscellaneous PIANO Button Yes (Portable Grand Button)
Storage and
Connectivity
Storage Internal Memory Approx. 1.3MB
Connectivity
DC IN 12V
Headphones/Output Standard stereo phone jack (PHONES/OUTPUT)
Sustain Pedal Yes
AUX IN Yes (Stereo mini jack)
USB TO HOST Yes
Sound System
Amplifiers 2.5W + 2.5W
Speakers 12cm x 2
Specifications
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
77
Appendix
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale,
please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Power Supply
Power Supply
AC Adaptor
Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended
by Yamaha
Others: PA-3C,PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha
Batteries
Six 1.5V “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or
six 1.2V “AA” size Ni-MH rechargeable batteries (HR6)
Power Consumption 5W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor)
Auto Power Off Yes
Included Accessories
• Music rest
• Owner’s Manual
• AC adaptor *1 (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
• Online Member Product Registration
*1: May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check
with your Yamaha dealer.
Separately Sold Accessories
(May not be available depending on your area.)
• AC adaptor:
Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha
• Keyboard stand: L-2C
• Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150
• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5
• Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01
PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual
78
Appendix
Index
A
A-B Repeat .............................29
AC Adaptor .............................12
Accessories ............................77
ACMP .....................................22
Arpeggio .................................19
Arpeggio Type ........................ 74
Arpeggio Velocity ....................46
audio .......................................30
Audio Device ..........................30
Auto Accompaniment ..............22
Auto Accompaniment range ...22
AUTO FILL ..............................24
Auto Power Off ..................13, 47
AUX IN ....................................30
B
Backup Parameters ................49
Batteries .................................. 12
Battery Type ......................13, 47
Beat ........................................ 15
BGM .......................................28
C
Chord ................................ 15, 25
Chord Dictionary .....................26
Chord Progressions ................40
Chord Study ............................39
Chorus ....................................18
Chorus Type .....................46, 75
Clear (Backup parameters) .....49
Clear (User Song) ..................42
computer .................................48
Computer-related Operations ...8
D
Demo ................................ 27, 47
Display .................................... 15
Drum Kit List ...........................67
Dual Voice .........................17, 46
Duo .........................................21
E
Effect Type List .......................73
Effects ..................................... 18
ENDING .................................24
External Clock ........................47
F
Fast Forward ...........................28
Fast Reverse ...........................28
Footswitch .........................14, 20
Function List ...........................45
Functions ................................45
G
GM System Level 1 ...................8
Grade ......................................36
Guide Note .............................37
H
Harmony ................................ 19
Harmony Type .................. 20, 73
Headphones ........................... 14
I
Initial Send ............................. 47
Initialization ............................ 49
INTRO .................................... 24
iPad ........................................ 48
iPhone .................................... 48
iPhone/iPad Connection
Manual .................................. 8
K
Key Transpose ................... 45
Keyboard Display ................... 15
Keys To Success .................... 33
L
Lesson .................................... 32
Listening ................................. 36
Local Control .......................... 47
M
MAIN ...................................... 24
Main Voice .............................. 16
Master EQ .............................. 44
Measure ................................. 15
Melody Suppressor ................ 31
Metronome ............................. 16
MIDI Basics .............................. 8
MIDI Reference ........................ 8
Music Database ..................... 23
Music Database List ............... 72
music rest ............................... 14
Musicsoft Downloader ............ 23
N
Notation .................................. 15
O
One Touch Setting .................. 16
P
Panel Sustain ......................... 18
Part ......................................... 29
Passing Status ....................... 34
Pause ..................................... 28
Pedal ...................................... 14
Phrase Repeat ....................... 35
Pitch Transpose ................. 45
Pitch Tuning ....................... 45
Playback ................................. 28
Portable Grand ....................... 16
Power Requirements .............. 12
R
Random playback ................... 28
Recording ............................... 41
Recording (track) .................... 42
Registration Memory .............. 43
Reverb ....................................18
Reverb Level .......................... 46
Reverb Type ..................... 46, 75
rhythm .................................... 22
rit. ........................................... 24
S
Sections ................................. 24
Song ...................................... 27
Song Book ............................... 8
Song Book Sample ................ 52
Song Category ....................... 27
Song List ................................ 70
Specifications ..........................76
Split Point .................... 17, 22, 45
Split Voice ......................... 17, 46
Style ....................................... 22
Style File ............................ 8, 23
Style List ................................ 71
Sustain ....................................14
Synchro Start ......................... 22
T
Tap function ........................... 24
Tempo .........................16, 24, 27
Time Signature ........................16
Timing .................................... 36
Touch Response .....................18
Touch Tutor ............................ 38
Track ...................................... 41
Transpose .............................. 45
Troubleshooting ...................... 50
Tuning .................................... 45
U
USB Audio ............................. 48
USB TO HOST ....................... 48
User Songs ............................ 41
V
Voice .......................................16
Voice List ............................... 62
Volume ..............................14, 45
Volume (AUX IN) .................... 45
Volume (Harmony) ................. 46
Volume (Metronome) ............. 47
Volume (Style, Song) ............. 45
Volume (USB TO HOST) ....... 45
Volume (Voice) ....................... 46
W
Waiting ................................... 36
X
XGlite ....................................... 8
Y
Your Tempo ............................ 47
79
(weee_battery_eu_en_02)
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries:
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries
should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in
accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal
service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
For business users in the European Union:
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union:
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the EU Battery
Directive for the chemical involved.
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON
PORTABLE KEYBOARDS
(NP, PSRE, PSREW, PSRF, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)
Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free
performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every
Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the
Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s
authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted
Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or
Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.
Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or
otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or
materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha
elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges
and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping
charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage,
deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow
instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair
or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on
which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to
perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to
power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by
improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or
forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not
transferable.
In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area.
Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact
Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local
authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer
has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at
www.Yamaha.com
. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the
problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase
document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found
ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon
receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.
Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER
EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.
YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT
YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This
is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it
any other express warranty.
If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373
Telephone: 800-854-1569
www.yamaha.com
Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America.
MEMO
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,
Canada
Tel: +1-416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José
Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,
D.F., C.P. 03900, México
Tel: +52-55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –
Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,
Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: +54-11-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,
P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: +44-1908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch
Switzerland in Thalwil
Seestrasse 18a, 8800 Thalwil, Switzerland
Tel: +41-44-3878080
AUSTRIA/CZECH REPUBLIC/
HUNGARY/ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/
SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900
POLAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Sp.z o.o. Oddział w Polsce
ul. Wielicka 52, 02-657 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: +48-22-880-08-88
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: +359-2-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta
Tel: +356-2133-2093
NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: +31-347-358040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: +33-1-6461-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Via Tinelli N.67/69 20855 Gerno di Lesmo (MB),
Italy
Tel: +39-039-9065-1
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,
Greece
Tel: +30-210-6686260
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46-31-89-34-00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Denmark,
Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland
Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark
Tel: +45-44-92-49-00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Antaksentie 4
FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland
Tel: +358 (0)96185111
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway
Tel: +47-6716-7800
ICELAND
Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.
Sidumula 20
IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: +354-525-5050
CROATIA
Euro Unit D.O.O.
Slakovec 73
40305 Nedelisce
Tel: +38540829400
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,
Moscow, 121059, Russia
Tel: +7-495-626-5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
TURKEY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz
Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel: +90-212-999-8010
CYPRUS
Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.
Nikis Ave 2k
1086 Nicosia
Tel: + 357-22-511080
Major Music Center
21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy
P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel: (392) 227 9213
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-400-051-7700
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Private Limited
P-401, JMD Megapolis, Sector-48, Sohna Road,
Gurgaon-122018, Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 06169, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: +65-6740-9200
TAIWAN
Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd., Banqiao Dist.,
New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Tel: +886-2-7741-8888
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +66-2215-2622
VIETNAM
Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
http://asia.yamaha.com
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
VIC 3006, Australia
Tel: +61-3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: +64-9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
http://asia.yamaha.com
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
DMI20
Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan
(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
ZY73930
Manual Development Group
© 2017 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2017 PO##*.*-**B0
Printed in China
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Documenttranscriptie
Setting Up Appendix Reference DIGITAL KEYBOARD Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–7. Owner’s Manual EN For this instrument SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Address : Telephone : Type of Equipment : Model Name : Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 714-522-9011 Digital Keyboard PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and this instrument FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) 3 The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) (can_b_02) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTIO N RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For this instrument WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 77) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Battery • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. DMI-5 1/3 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 5 - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. - Use the specified battery type (page 77) only. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. DMI-5 6 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. 2/3 Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below. Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 49) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto an external device such as a computer (page 48). DMI-5 About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases. About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • iPhone, iPad, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 3/3 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 7 About the Manuals In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available. MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do. Computer-related Operations Contains instructions about computer-related functions. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the desired files. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • AC adaptor*1 • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Formats and functions GM System Level 1 USB “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). XGlite The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. 8 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Style File Format (SFF) Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature gives you maximum expressive control over the level of the Voices. Setting Up Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Contents Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Setting Up 12 Power Requirements .......................................... 12 Turning the Power On......................................... 13 Setting the Auto Power Off function.................... 13 Adjusting the Master Volume.............................. 14 Connecting Headphones or External Speaker ... 14 Using a Pedal (Sustain) ...................................... 14 Using the music rest ........................................... 14 Display Items and Basic Operations 15 Display Items ...................................................... 15 Basic Operations ................................................ 15 Reference Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16 Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16 Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 16 Using the Metronome ......................................... 16 Layering a Dual Voice......................................... 17 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 17 Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard ... 18 Applying Effects to the Sound............................. 18 Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 19 Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode) Playing Styles 21 22 Using the Music Database.................................. 23 Registering a Style File....................................... 23 Style Variations—Sections ................................. 24 Changing the Tempo .......................................... 24 Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 25 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary... 26 Playing Songs 27 Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 27 Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 27 BGM Playback .................................................... 28 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause... 28 Changing the Melody Voice................................ 28 A-B Repeat ......................................................... 29 Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 29 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 30 Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) ........................ 31 32 Downloading the Song Book ...............................33 Keys To Success.................................................33 Phrase Repeat.....................................................35 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................36 Learning How to Use “Touch” Control (Touch Tutor) 38 Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the Chords (Chord Study) 39 Hear and experience a sound of a single chord ...39 Hear and experience basic chord progressions ...39 Playing Chords along with Chord Progressions of a Song Reference Setting Up Using the Song Lesson Feature 40 Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of the Lesson function.........................................40 Recording Your Performance 41 Track Structure of a Song....................................41 Quick Recording ..................................................41 Recording to a Specified Track ...........................42 Clearing a User Song ..........................................42 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 43 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory ...........................................................43 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ...........................................................43 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound 44 The Functions 45 Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 48 Connecting to a computer ...................................48 Connecting an iPhone/iPad .................................48 Backup and Initialization 49 Backup Parameters .............................................49 Initialization..........................................................49 Appendix Troubleshooting .............................................50 Song Book Sample.........................................52 Voice List ........................................................62 Drum Kit List...................................................67 Song List .........................................................70 Style List .........................................................71 Music Database List.......................................72 Effect Type List...............................................73 Specifications .................................................76 Index ................................................................78 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 9 Appendix About the Manuals................................................ 8 Included Accessories............................................ 8 Formats and functions .......................................... 8 Setting Up Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel NOTE Setting Up • The illustrations and displays as shown in this manual are based on the PSR-E363. • Please note that the PSR-EW300, PSR-E363 and YPT-360 have different numbers of keys: the PSR-EW300 has 76 keys, and the PSR-E363 and YPT-360 have 61 keys. q e u r t w o y !0 Style List (page 71) i !1 !2 !3 Song List (page 70) !4 !5 Display (page 15) Voice List (page 62) Music Database List (page 72) @9 C1 C2 As illustrated, each note of the keyboard has a specific note number and name (e.g., 036/C1), which is used in making various settings, such as Split Point (page 22). PSR-E363, YPT-360: 036 (C1) – 096 (C6) PSR-EW300: 028 (E0) – 103 (G6) C3 C4 C6 !9 !6 @5 @6 !7 @7 !8 @8 @0 10 C5 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual @1 @2 @3 @4 Panel Controls and Terminals [ ] (Standby/On) switch .................... page 13 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ...................... page 14 [DEMO] button ......................................page 28 [METRONOME] button ......................... page 16 [TEMPO/TAP] button ............................page 24 Rear Panel #0 #1 #2 Setting Up q w e r t #3 In the Lesson mode y PART [L] button ..............................................page 36 [R] button ..............................................page 36 #4 In the Recording mode y [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 41 [REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 41 u [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 33 i [PHRASE REPEAT] button...................page 35 o [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button ...............................................................page 36 In the Song mode [A-B REPEAT] button ...........................page 29 [REW] button ........................................page 28 [FF] button ............................................page 28 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 28 !0 !1 !2 !3 #0 #1 #2 #3 [SUSTAIN] jack .....................................page 14 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack......................page 14 [AUX IN] jack.........................................page 30 [USB TO HOST] terminal* ....................page 48 * For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 8) on the website. When connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. #4 DC IN jack .............................................page 12 In the Style mode [ACMP ON/OFF] button........................page 22 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .................page 24 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....................page 24 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 22 !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 [START/STOP] button...........................page 27 [REC] button .........................................page 41 [SONG] button ......................................page 27 [VOICE] button...................................... page 16 [STYLE] button .....................................page 22 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]............ page 15 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ............... page 16 [REVERB] button.......................... pages 18, 44 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 31 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 43 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 45 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 23 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17 [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button.......... page 19 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit .... page 16 Panel Setup (Panel Settings) By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings as described here. These settings of the instrument are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual. The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.” PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Setting Up Power Requirements Using Batteries Although the instrument will run either from an AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/ Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickelmetal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. WARNING Using an AC Adaptor Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the illustration. 1 • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off. 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on DC IN jack (page 11) the instrument’s bottom panel. AC adaptor 2 AC outlet WARNING • Use the specified AC adaptor (page 77) only. Using the wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. WARNING • When using the AC adaptor with a removable plug, make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. • If the plug is accidentally removed from the AC adaptor, slide it back in until it clicks into place, taking care to avoid touching any internal metal parts. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. 3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. Plug Slide the plug as indicated. The shape of the plug differs depending on your area. CAUTION • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn the power off and disconnect the plug from the outlet. NOTE • Follow the order shown above in reverse when disconnecting the AC adaptor. 12 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. • Make sure to set the battery type correctly (page 13). • When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already recharged ones. Setting Up • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. Setting the battery type Depending on the battery type to be used, you may need to change the battery type setting on this instrument. Alkaline (and manganese) batteries are chosen by default. After installing new batteries and turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately (rechargeable or not) via Function number 046 (page 47). NOTICE • Failure to set the battery type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the battery type correctly. Setting the Auto Power Off function Setting Up NOTE To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off is 30 minutes by default; however, you can change the setting. To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “AutoOff” (Function 045; page 47) appears, then use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes) Default value: 30 (minutes) To disable the Auto Power Off function: Turning the Power On 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.” Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key on the keyboard. A message “oFF AutoOff” appears briefly, then the instrument starts up with the Auto Power Off function disabled. The Auto Power Off function also can be disabled by selecting Off in Function number 045 (page 47). PSR-E363, YPT-360 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. The Voice name appears on the display. Adjust the volume as desired while playing the keyboard. The lowest key 3 Press and hold the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to set the instrument to standby mode. CAUTION • Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. NOTICE • Press only the [ ] (Standby/On) switch when turning the power on. Any other operations such as pressing the pedal are not allowed. Doing so may cause the instrument to malfunction. PSR-EW300 NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. NOTE • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off with the Auto Power Off function. For details, see page 49. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Adjusting the Master Volume Using a Pedal (Sustain) Setting Up To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial while playing the keyboard. You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch (FC5 or FC4A; sold separately) plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Connecting Headphones or External Speaker NOTE • Plug or unplug the footswitch while the power is off. Also, do not press the footswitch when turning the power on. Doing so changes the polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed operation. • The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and style (automatic accompaniment; page 22). Using the music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Standard stereo phone plug Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES/ OUTPUT] jack. This jack also functions as an external output. By connecting to a computer, keyboard amplifier, recorder, or other audio device, you can output the audio signal of this instrument to that external device. The speakers of this instrument are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum. Otherwise, damage to the components or electrical shock may occur. NOTICE • To avoid possible damage to the external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, do so in reverse order: first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. 14 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Display Items and Basic Operations Display Items Lesson Indication On/Off status This area indicates the Lesson related status is on. Notation Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. Keys To Success (page 33) ... Auto Accompaniment (page 22) Phrase Repeat (page 35) Chord Progression (page 40) ... Touch Response (page 18) ... Arpeggio (page 19) ... Duo (page 21) Indicates the Passing Status (page 34) of the Keys To Success lesson. Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function (page 26) is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. NOTE 001 • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. Setting Up Song/Voice/Style These indicate the operating condition of the instrument. ... Split (page 17) ... Dual (page 17) ... Harmony (page 19) GrandPno 003 The illustration is of the PSR-E363. Chord Song Track status Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto Accompaniment range (page 22) of the keyboard, or specified via Song playback. Measure or Function Normally indicates the current measure number of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION] button (page 45) is in use, this indicates the Function number. Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or target Track of Song recording (page 29, 42). Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data 003 027 Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Beat Indicates the current beat of playback. C3 Basic Operations Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values. Number buttons [-] and [+] buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Harpsichord. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3], or simply press [3]. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 15 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Reference In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of Voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical sounds. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice number 001 Reference Appears after the [VOICE] button is pressed. GrandPno Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired Voice. Refer to the Voice List on page 62. 096 Flute The Voice “001 Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Using the Metronome The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. Select the Voice you want to play 3 Play the keyboard. 2 Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. To change the tempo: Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Preset Voice Types 090 Tempo 001–197 Instrument Voices (including sound effects). 198–215 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 67. 216–235 Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by simply playing the keyboard (page 19). 236–574 XGlite Voices (page 64) To set the Time Signature: 000 One Touch Setting The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice when you select a Style or Song (excepting the Song inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up “TimeSigN” (Functions 036; page 47), then use the number buttons, [+] and [-] buttons. Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. To set the Metronome Volume: This can be set via Function number 038 (page 47). 16 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. 001 GrandPno Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and Right hand areas. Appears when Dual is on 001 GrandPno Reference Layering a Dual Voice Appears when Split is on Two Voices will sound at the same time. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) 2 Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. To select a different Dual Voice: Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [DUAL] button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 013; page 46), then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 036 (C1) 048 (C2) Split Voice 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice and Dual Voice You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the Left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” (Function 007; page 45) which can be changed from the default F#2 key. 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. To select a different Split Voice: Press and hold the [SPLIT] button to call up “S.Voice” (Function 017; page 46), then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 17 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and expressively control the level of the Voices according to your playing strength. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “TouchRes” (Function 008) appears. Reference After a few seconds, the current Touch Response appears. Applying Effects to the Sound This instrument can apply various Effects as listed below to the instrument’s sound. Reverb Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one by the operation below. To select a Reverb type 1 Press the [REVERB] button. After “Reverb” (Function 021; page 46) is shown for a few seconds, the current type appears. TouchRes Reverb 008 021 Medium 2 02 008 2 Use the number buttons [1]–[4], [+], [-] buttons to select a Touch Response setting between 1 and 4. Touch Response 1 Soft Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch who want to maintain a consistent, relatively loud volume. 2 Medium Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. 3 Hard The keys must be played very strongly to generate loud volume. This setting is best for a wide dynamic range and optimum expressive control of the sound, from pianissimo to fortissimo. 4 Fixed All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. Hall2 021 Current type 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired type. When “Off” is selected, Reverb is off. You can also set the Reverb depth via Function number 022 (page 46). Chorus Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 023 (page 46). You can also set the Chorus depth for Voices via Function numbers 012, 016, 020 (page 46). The Chorus depth cannot be applied to the Styles or Songs. Panel Sustain By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function number 024 (page 46), you can add a fixed, automatic sustain to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. Or, you can produce a natural sustain as desired with the footswitch (sold separately; page 14). NOTE • Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to which sustain is not applied. 18 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Voice played on the keyboard. By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply harmony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be used creatively in music production as well as performance. 2 Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button for longer than a second so that “Harm/Arp” (Functions 028; page 46) appears on the display. After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the current type appears. Harm/Arp 028 Hold for longer than a second. 001 Duet Reference Adding Harmony or Arpeggio 028 1 Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but- ton to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio function. Current type 3 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired type. 001 GrandPno Appears when the Harmony is turned on. or 106 Analogon Appears when the Arpeggio is turned on. When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on, the most suitable one will be selected for the current Main Voice. If you want to select a specific type, select it by the operation steps 2 and 3 below. NOTE • The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main Voice. • When selecting a Voice number between 216 and 235, the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on. • When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005, the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand melody play if you turn on the Style (page 22) and press chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer to the Harmony Type list on page 73; to specify an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list on page 74. NOTE • When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176, select the corresponding Voice below as the Main Voice. 143–173: Select a Drum Kit (Voice No.198–207). 174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.” (Voice No.208). 175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.209) or “Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.210). 176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.211). 4 Press a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio. When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the played sound of the Main Voice. Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. 5 To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off, press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button again. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 19 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices To adjust the Harmony Volume: How to play the various Types The method of sounding the Harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01– 05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to produce the Harmony effect. For Types 06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. • Harmony Type 001 to 005 Reference Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22). • Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill) Hold down two keys. This can be adjusted via Function number 029 (page 46). To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity: This can be adjusted via Function number 030 (page 46). Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch (Hold) You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. 1 Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 031) item appears on the display. After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the current setting is shown. • Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo) Pdl Func 031 Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo) 1 Play the keys. • Arpeggio Type 027 to 176 When Split is off: Sustain 031 2 Use the number buttons [1]–[3], [+], [-] buttons to select “Arp Hold.” If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.” Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice and the Dual Voice. When Split is on: 2 Arp Hold 031 Arpeggio function applies only to the split Voice. NOTE • Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/ Dual Voices simultaneously. • Selecting a Voice number between 226 and 235 as the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split automatically. 20 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 3 Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio playback using the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode) When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one person on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other person watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side. mode, simultaneously hold down the [L] button and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. “DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point and the keyboard is divided into two sections: one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice. How sounds are output in the Duo mode Notes played in the left Voice section sound from the left side speaker while notes played in the right Voice section sound from the right side speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This output setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut” setting (Function 027; page 46). Reference 1 To start this instrument in the Duo NOTE • In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteristics of the stereo sound may differ from those in the normal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate” (page 46). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit features a different stereo pan position. Using sustain in the Duo mode on DuoMode Equivalent to C3 (PSR-EW300) Split Point: 066 (F#3) Equivalent to C3 (PSR-E363, YPT-360) Equivalent to C3 Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by using one of the following methods in the Duo mode like the usual mode. • Press the foot switch (page 14) connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Set “Sustain” (Function 024; page 46) to on. Sustain is applied to all notes. NOTE Left Voice Right Voice NOTE • The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice). • In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed from F# 3. 2 One person should play the left Voice section of the keyboard while the other plays the right Voice section. Selecting a Voice Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in “Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16. NOTE • When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 162 to 188, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice. • Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode. • Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left Voice section and the right Voice section. • While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is maintained even when the power is turned off. Style Playback in the Duo mode Although full Style features (accompaniment) cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part of a Style can be played back while playing the left/right Voices normally. Recording in the Duo mode The right Voice section and the left Voice section are recorded on the same track. 3 To exit from the Duo mode, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the power, and turn the power back on again normally. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 21 Playing Styles This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Style. 020 16Beat The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in the Style List (page 71). Flashes when sync start is on. Style Number 001 BritRock Reference Style Name Appears when Style mode is active. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn 4 Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start playback. Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. For information about chords, refer to “Chord Types for Style Playback” (page 25) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 26). Split Point on the Auto Accompaniment. 020 16Beat 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) playback. You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 24. To play back the rhythm part only 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Auto Accompaniment range The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can be changed from the default of F#2 via Function number 007 (page 45). 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. This puts the Style playback in “standby” and Style starts playing back when you play the keyboard. 22 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm part can be played back, and you can play a melody performance using the entire keyboard range. NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (157–165) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page. Adjusting the Style Volume To adjust the volume balance between Style playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume. This can be set via Function number 001 (page 45). Playing Styles If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls up the ideal settings. 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. 001 Jude Hey 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Music Database. Registering a Style File Style data created on another instrument or computer can be registered (loaded) to Style numbers 166–175, and you can play them just the same as the internal preset Styles. 1 Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a computer to this instrument by using Musicsoft Downloader. For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 8) on the website. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “StyleReg” (Function 009; page 46) appears. This operation calls up the panel settings such as Voice and Style that are registered to the selected Music Database. The category name of Music Database List is provided on the front panel, or in the Music Database List (page 72). 3 Play the keyboard as described in Steps 4–5 on page 22. Reference Using the Music Database StyleReg 009 After about two seconds, a registerable Style file name will appear in the display. 3 If necessary, select the desired Style by using the [+] or [-] button. 4 Press the [0] button. As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 166– 175) appears on the display. If desired, select a different number using the [+] or [-] button. 5 Press the [0] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 6 Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 7 Press the [STYLE] button, use the [+] or [-] button to select a Style from 166–175, and then try playing it back. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles Style Variations—Sections Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. These instructions cover a typical example for using the Sections. 7 After the Intro finishes, play the key- board according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. FILL A≥B 1–3 Reference Same as Steps 1–3 in page 22. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. MAIN A Current Section 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. 6 Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 25. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Auto Accompaniment range 24 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Changing the Tempo Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the number buttons, [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the Tempo value. 090 Tempo Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Song. Using the Tap function While a Song or Style is playing back, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat Song or Style. Playing Styles Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details. indicates the root note. Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 Reference Major • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, m7(11), 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversions of the 7sus4 chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only a specific part, such as the rhythm, will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 Cm 7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. Dict. 001 2-2. 1 Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” “Dict.” will appear in the display. Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “ ” and “ .” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Reference Hold for longer than a second. Dict. This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. • The range to the right of “ ”: Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no sound. • The range between “ ” and “ ”: Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “ ”: Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the above two ranges. Keyboard playing range Chord Type range Root range 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ ” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Notation of chord Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(# 11), b 5, M7b 5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b 5, 7b 5, sus2 3 Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “ .” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. 4 To exit from the Chord Dictionary mode, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE]. 26 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson. Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand. Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.) Reference These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. Learn how to use expressive “touch” control while playing the keyboard according to the strength level displayed in the LCD. Hear and experience the sound of chords and easy chord progressions while playing the keyboard according to the LCD display indications. Learn how to play chords with Songs featuring simple, fundamental chord progressions. Songs (User Songs) you record yourself. Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 8). Listening to a Demo Song Song number Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo Songs in sequence. 004 Elise 1 Song name Appears when Song mode is active. When Song numbers 001 to 003 are played back in sequence and the last Song (003) is finished, playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button or the [START/STOP] button. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. NOTE • You can select the next or previous Song in order by using the [+]/[-] buttons after pressing the [DEMO] button. The selection range is all Songs in the selected Demo Group (Function 043; page 47). To change the tempo: Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 24. Selecting and Playing Back a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the Adjusting the Song Volume To adjust the volume balance between Song playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume. This can be set via Function number 002 (page 45). Number buttons to select the desired Song. Refer to the Song List (page 70). PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs BGM Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause Like the transport controls on an audio player, this instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song. Fast Forward 1 Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. than a second. Reference “DemoGrp” (Function 043; page 47) is shown in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current repeat playback target. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select a playback group. Demo Preset songs (001–003) Preset All preset songs (001–102) User All User songs (155–159) Download All songs transferred from a computer (160–) NOTE Fast Reverse Pause During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO] button. • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. 3 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or press the [START/STOP] button. Random Song Playback When the Demo Group (above) is set to something other than “Demo,” the playback order via the [DEMO] button can be changed between numerical order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Function 044; page 47) is called up, then select “Normal” or “Random.” 28 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other desired Voice. 1 Select a Song. 2 Select the desired Voice. 3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the selected Voice replaces the Song’s original melody Voice. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. Playing Songs A-B Repeat Turning Each Part On/Off You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A B As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below), Songs other than Song numbers 125 to 154 consist of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individually by pressing the corresponding button, L or R. Repeat playback of this section 020 2 When playback reaches to the point you FrereJac 010 want to specify as the start point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A point. Lit: Track contains data 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. Reference 1 Start playback of the Song (page 27). Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off during playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on the keyboard. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the Parts. NOTE • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers CAUTION • Before connecting, turn off the power of both this instrument and the external audio device. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player, with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you play the keyboard along with playback of your music player. NOTICE • To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the external device, and then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, and then to the external device. Reference 1 Turn off the power for both the external audio device and this instrument. 2 Connect the audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at one side for connecting to this instrument and the plug matching the output jack of the external audio device at the other side. 5 Adjust the volume balance between the external audio device and this instrument. Adjust the audio playback volume on the audio device, then adjust the entire volume by rotating the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instrument. NOTE • You can adjust the level of the input from the external audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function number 003 (page 45) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons. 6 Play the keyboard along with the sound of the audio device. You can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of audio playback. For details, refer to page 31. 7 After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. Stereo-mini plug Audio device (Portable audio player, etc.) NOTE • If you are using a computer or a smart device such as an iPhone/iPad, you can also connect it to the [USB TO HOST] terminal (see “Connecting to a Computer” on page 48). 3 Turn on the external audio device, then this instrument. 4 Play back the connected external audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 30 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) When you output the audio sound of an external audio device or a computer connected to the [AUX IN] jack or the [USB TO HOST] terminal through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of audio playback. You can use the function to practice the melody part along with the audio playback. 2 Adjust the pan position of the sound to be cancelled (lowered) by using the [+], [-] buttons. NOTE • Depending on the particular music content, the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. 1 Play back audio on the connected exterReference nal device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. on MelodySP Appears when Melody Suppressor is on NOTE • When the instrument is connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, and Audio Loop Back (page 47, Function 035) is set to OFF, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be used. 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. When the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled (or lowered) as expected 1 Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “SupprPan” (Function 026; page 46) while the Melody Suppressor function is turned on. L63 – C – R63 (Left – Center – Right) C SupprPan 026 Hold for longer than a second. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 31 Using the Song Lesson Feature Use these convenient features to practice the preset Songs and improve your playing skills. The lessons are arranged for optimum, enjoyable learning, so select the one suitable for you, and take your keyboard skills higher, step by step. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/ Keys To Success (Page 33) You can select just the key phrases of the Song—the ones you like most or need to work on—and practice them one by one. This lesson is ideal for beginning players. Passed Passed ✩ Reference Select the Song you want to learn. Practice Step 1 Passed ✩✩ Practice Steps 2, 3, 4... and so on. ✩✩✩ Practice the last Step. You’re done! Each Song consists of several Steps. Each time you play all the way through the current Step, your performance will be evaluated. A score of “60” or more indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step, which begins automatically. The passing status ✩ is saved, but you can go on to next Step even when you didn’t pass the Step, or you can retry the Step later. Phrase Repeat (Page 35) You can practice two or more phrases at once repeatedly by specifying them, as desired. This is ideal as a finishing practice before you try a last (finishing) Step to pass in the Keys to Success mode, or when you just want to practice the difficult phrase(s) repeatedly. Phrase mark Repeat playback of this section Listening, Timing and Waiting (Page 36) You can practice the preset Songs in three steps, independently for the right or left hand, or both hands together. This is ideal when you want to practice all the way through the Song with the selected part. Lesson 1 (Listening) ....... Listen to the playback part you will play. Remember it as best as you can. Lesson 2 (Timing) ........... Learn to play the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes will sound. Lesson 3 (Waiting) .......... Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing. The Song pauses until you play the right note. Select the Song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Start the lesson! You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 33) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 36). If you feel it difficult to play the specific phrase in the Keys to Success lesson, use Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson to listen to the phrase, to practice only the timing to play, or to let the phrase pause until you play the correct notes. The passing status is not shown when the selected lesson playback starts in the Keys to Success mode. 32 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Using the Song Lesson Feature In addition, various learning functions are provided for your enjoyable playing experience as follows: Touch Tutor (page 38) Lets you learn how hard or soft to play the keys for more expressive performances. Chord Study (page 39) Lets you hear and experience the sound of the chords to use styles efficiently. Chord Progressions (page 40) Lets you hear and experience standard chord progressions. Mastering the typical chord progressions in specific musical genres enables you to play a wider variety of songs with the Style function. you have already passed several Steps, the next Step number appears on the display. To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/ Reference Downloading the Song Book Appears when Keys to Success is on Step01 Keys To Success In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the entire Song. 1 Prepare the Song Book. Download the Song Book from the above website, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs at the end of this manual. The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are pre-programmed) will differ depending on the Song. For details, refer to the Song Book. Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson Current Step number 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, playback of the current Step starts. NOTE • All preset Songs 004 to 102 other than 001–003 and 103– 154 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs. Step01 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select a 001 Song for your lesson. Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corresponding page of the Song Book. 004 Elise 1 3 Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button to NOTE • For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may be slower than original. 5 Practice the phrase in the current Step. Referring to the notation in the Song Book and the notes shown on the display, press the notes. engage this lesson. The keyboard icon, “Step01” and lesson part (“R” or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Song Lesson Feature 6 Confirm the evaluation in the current Step. When the current Step reaches the end, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 Confirming the Passing Status You can confirm the passing status of each Song simply by selecting a Song and each Step. When Step is selected Excellen Step01 001 Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. ✩ : Passed No information: Not yet passed Reference A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did not pass this Step and you should try the same Step again, which begins automatically. A score of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step, which begins automatically. When Song is selected 004 Elise 1 001 NOTE • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. ✩✩✩ : ✩✩✩ : ✩✩✩ : ✩✩✩ : 7 Execute Step 2, 3, 4, and so on. In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all the way through the Song. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE • Even during lesson, you can select another Step by using the [+]/[-] buttons. 8 To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. There are one or more Steps not yet passed in addition to the last Step Only last Step passed All Steps passed other than last Step All Steps passed Clearing the Passing Status You can clear existing passing status entries for the entire Song or a specific Step of the Song. To clear the passing status entries of all Steps: Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds, with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. To clear the passing status entry for a specific Step: Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success, select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. NOTE • This operation cannot be executed during playback. 34 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Using the Song Lesson Feature Practicing two or more Phrases Phrase Repeat You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks preprogrammed in the Preset Songs (excepting the Song numbers 001–003, 103–154). You can confirm the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 8). NOTE • Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song data, which indicates a specific location in the Song. Phrase mark By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B (as the end point), you can practice two or more Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display, and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts. To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again. NOTE Reference • You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons. • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Repeat playback of this section Practicing only a single Phrase During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to practice. The corresponding Phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off the L or R part (page 29), then practice the phrase which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on P03 REPEAT Phrase number Even during repeat playback, you can select any other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you can return to normal playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 35 Using the Song Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting Lesson 1—Listening In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well. Lesson 2—Timing In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes shown in the display will sound. Reference Lesson 3—Waiting In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. NOTE • If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF via the Function number 041 (page 47). 3 Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button to start playback of the Song Lesson. Pressing this button repeatedly will change the Lesson number from 1: LISTENING 2: TIMING 3: WAITING off 1…. Press this button until the desired number is shown on the display. NOTE • During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. • The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting; page 16) during the Lesson. 4 When Lesson playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. “2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your performance in four levels. 1 Press the [SONG] button then select a Excellent! ~~~~~~~~ Very Good! ~~~~~~ Good ~~~~ OK ~~ Song for your lesson. NOTE • The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 48), but cannot be applied to the User Songs. NOTE • Songs 125 to 154 are not compatible with the Listening, Timing and Waiting Lessons. 2 Press either or both the [R] and [L] but- tons to select the part you want to practice. Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson Left Right Both-hands lesson BothHand NOTE • In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the current Song does not contain a left-hand part. 36 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the selected Voice. NOTE • The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during lessons. 5 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Using the Song Lesson Feature When the “Guide” function is on, you can hear the Guide note while you are practicing with Lesson 3 (Waiting), and this is ideal when you are not sure of which keys to play next. The Guide note will sound slightly behind the timing to indicate the correct note, when you fail to play the correct note with the correct timing. When you play the correct note with the correct timing, the Guide note will not sound and the playback continues. If you don’t want to hear the Guide note, turn the function to off in the following steps. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “Guide” (Function 042) appears. Guide Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 33) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 36). 1 Enable the Keys to Success lesson. Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 33. 2 Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-] buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select the desired lesson. Reference Turning the Guide note off The selected lesson playback starts under the Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the current Step via the selected Lesson. As evaluation for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is not available. 042 3 To return to only the Keys to Success 2 Use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the value “oFF.” The default value of this function is “on” (Guide note will sound.) NOTE • The Guide setting cannot be changed during the Lesson mode. The Guide function can be used for all preset Songs, except Songs in categories “FAVORITE WITH STYLE” (left-hand part) and “CHORD PROGRESSION,” and No.79. mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly until “StepXX” (XX: number) appears in the display. 4 To exit from the Lesson mode, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. Phrase Repeat with Listening, Timing or Waiting With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or three times to start and use Lesson playback with Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again several times to exit from the Lesson mode stops playback and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode. NOTE • In this status, the evaluation function is not available. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 37 Learning How to Use “Touch” Control (Touch Tutor) This learning feature lets you practice how hard or soft to play the keys for musical expression, referred to as “Touch” in this chapter, by playing back Song numbers 103 to 112 (in the “Touch Tutor” category). Playing back Songs from this category shows indications for the appropriate playing strength. Try playing according to the level displayed in the LCD as the Song progresses. NOTE • Be sure to set the Touch Response parameter (page 18) to a value other than “Fixed.” When set to “Fixed,” the Touch Tutor function is inactive. Try playing so that the indications below appear (as target values) while you play. 00 : Soft 00000 : Medium 00000000 : Hard 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 103 to Reference 112 in the “Touch Tutor” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27. To play with the same Voice that is used in a performance data, select Voice number “000” (OTS; page 16). After this operation, please make sure to go back to the Touch Tutor display by pressing the [SONG] button. 103 “/” remains or “~” will be shown when your touch is softer or harder than the target value. Your touch is harder than the target value (Target value: medium, your touch: hard) Target value: medium TTutor01 00000~~~ 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play Your touch: hard back the selected Song. 3 When the following display appears, play the notes shown in the display with the strength level displayed in the LCD. Your touch is softer than the target value (Target value: medium, your touch: soft) Target value: medium Play while the strength level is shown. 00/// Strength level (Target value) // : Soft ///// : Medium //////// : Hard 103 //////// 003 Your touch: soft 4 To stop the playback, press the [START/ STOP] button. To exit from the Touch Tutor mode, select a Song from any other category, except “Touch Tutor.” NOTE The notes to play are indicated in the graphic keyboard in the display. Your actual playing “Touch” is indicated by “0.” 38 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual • This function cannot be used with Keys To Success. Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the Chords (Chord Study) You can hear and experience the sound of the chords used in a typical performance by playing back Song numbers 113 to 124 (in the “Chord Study” category). Song numbers 113 to 119 are very simple songs consisting of a single chord (C, Dm, Em, F, G, Am, Bm; respectively) played in various positions, letting you listen to and master the chords one by one. On the other hand, Song numbers 120 to 124 consist of several chords strung together in a pattern, for experiencing and understanding basic chord progressions. Hear and experience the sound of simple chords and progressions by playing back these Songs, and play the keyboard while following along with the music notation and key/chord indications shown in the display. 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 113 to 119 in the “CHORD STUDY” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 3 Hear and experience basic chord progressions Reference Hear and experience a sound of a single chord 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 120 to 124 by pressing the [+]/[-] buttons. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 3 Play the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. Play the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. 113 ChdStd01 003 NOTE • When playing the keyboard while playing back a Song, you should turn off any parts you don’t intend to have played back (page 29), to avoid exceeding the maximum number of simultaneous notes. If you feel it difficult to play the notes, use the Waiting function (page 36) to have the Song automatically pause until you play the correct notes. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly until “WAITING” appears in the display. To exit from the Waiting function, press the same button again. Listen to the basic chord progression, and play along with the Song repeatedly until you can smoothly perform and play along with the chord changes. If you feel it difficult to play the notes, use the Waiting function (page 36) to have the Song automatically pause until you play the correct notes. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly until “WAITING” appears in the display. To exit from the Waiting function, press the same button again. 4 To stop the playback, press the [START/ STOP] button. 4 To stop the playback, press the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 39 Playing Chords along with Chord Progressions of a Song Song numbers 125 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category are constructed from typical chord progressions. You can listen to and get a feel for the chord progressions by playing back the Song and playing the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. The number of keys that are indicated for you to play progress in sequence— from a single root note, to two notes, then three and four—getting you to gradually and naturally memorize the chords. Also, you can change the key of the Song, allowing you to practice the progressions in all keys for full mastery of the chords. 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 125 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27. the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. 2 Press After “CHORD PROGRESSION” scrolls across the To change the key of a Song: When Chord Progression is on, press one of the keys in the top octave (C5–B5; indicated to the right of “ROOT” on the panel, just above the keys) to change the tonic pitch of the Song. Root range Reference display, the tonic pitch of the selected Song and the number of the keys to be pressed are shown. Db Eb F# Ab Bb The tonic pitch of the selected Song: C C D E F G A B CPg Appears when Chord Progression is on. C 1Note The number of the keys to press: 1 For example, if you press the key D5 in the Song of C major, the key changes to D major. NOTE • The key of a Song cannot be changed during playback. NOTE • The initial key setting is C major or A minor. 3 Press the [+]/[-] buttons to select the number of the keys to be played. Each time the [+] button is pressed, the number of the keys to press is increased from just one root note (1Note) to two notes (2Notes), three notes (3Notes) and four notes (All). CPg C 2Notes NOTE • The number of the keys to press can also be set by using the number buttons [1]–[4]. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to play The number of the keys to be played Only one root note (1Note) Press only the root note of the chord. Two notes (2Notes) Press the 3rd interval of a chord along with the root note, and understand the difference between major chords and minor chords. Three notes (3Notes) Press the 5th interval of a chord along with the root note and the 3rd. Four notes (All) Press all the notes that make up the chord. Very often, chords are played with just three notes; however, another interval (such as a 7th) is sometimes added. Keep in mind that depending on the chord, there may be no 4th note. back the selected Song. 5 Play the keyboard looking at the notes shown on the display. CPg C 1Note 001 NOTE • When you play the keyboard within the range of C5–B5, the notes will not sound. the [PHRASE REPEAT] button 6 Press again to turn the Chord Progression function off. 40 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of the Lesson function You can practice the playing the chords in combination with “Waiting” (page 36) of the Lesson function by simply pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once. NOTE • Even if you play notes in octaves outside of the notes shown on the display (excluding the range of C5–B5, which are used to change the key of a Song), as well as different inversions of the chords, the playback will progress. Recording Your Performance You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 155–159). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. The recorded User Song can be played back in the same way as the preset Songs. To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC] button again to stop flashing on the display. You can record your performance to the following two tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously. Track 1: Your melody performance is recorded to this track. Track 2: Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord changes and Section changes), is recorded to this track. NOTICE • If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1 (Song Number 155)” will automatically be selected. In this case, since you will record over and erase any previous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you save your important data to a computer (see page 48). NOTE • ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you can select another Style in this status by using the [STYLE] and Number buttons. Reference Track Structure of a Song 3 Play the keyboard to start recording. Recording Data Capacity: A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. If ACMP is turned on, you can independently record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing the Section (page 24). Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) 36 Quick Recording 48 60 72 The operation is convenient for recording a new Song without having to specify a track. 1 Make the desired settings such as Voice and Style settings. If you want to record only the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record Style playback or Rhythm playback as well as melody performance, turn ACMP on (page 22). 2 Press the [REC] button to enter the Record Ready mode. This operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) as the recording target, if a User Song has not been specified in advance or if Record Ready mode has been entered from the Style mode. If you want to select another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons. Auto Accompaniment range 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then waiting until playback ends. NOTICE • After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal memory and result in a loss of data. 5 To play back the recorded Song, press the [START/STOP] button. Limitations while Recording • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons are not available, or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded: ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button. User Song Number EC User 1 001 Flashes PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 41 Recording Your Performance Recording to a Specified Track 1 Make the desired settings, such as those of Voice or Style. If you want to record the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 22). 2 While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to engage the Record mode. Reference If you want to record Style playback, make sure to select the Track 2. If you want to record melody performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as desired. The illustration below is the example when selecting Track 2. Clearing a User Song 1 Press the [SONG] button then select the desired User Song by using the Number buttons. 2 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. A confirmation message appears. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message appears again. The User Song appears on the display. User Song EC User 1 YES Sure? 001 To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for example and Track 1 contains already recorded data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will determine whether you listen to a previously recorded Track or not while recording a new Track. 3 Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. 4 Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 41) in “Quick Recording.” 42 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A “Writing!” message appears while the track is being cleared. Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9. Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings such as those 1 Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button. 2 Press and hold down the [REGIST MEM- LoadNo.? for Voice and Style. “LoadNo.?” appears on the display. ORY] button for longer than a second. Reference Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory “MemNo.?” appears on the display. MemNo.? Hold for longer than a second. 2 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display. 3 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, an “Overwr?” message appears in the display. To overwrite, press the [+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO]. 01 REGIST 1 The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Tempo, Main A/B Voice settings Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions Effect settings: Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Voice output, Panel Sustain on/off Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/off and all settings of the related Functions Other settings: Transpose, Split Point * When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style settings can be recorded or called up. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 43 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Hold down the [REVERB] button for lon- ger than a second to call up “MasterEQ” (Function 025; page 46). “MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Master EQ type appears. MasterEQ 025 Reference Hold for longer than a second. 1 Speaker 025 Current Master EQ type 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 44 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual The Functions The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several 2 Set the value by using the number but- times until the desired item appears. tons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. To decrease the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [-] button briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button does not change the Function number. Direct numeric entry. Press several times as necessary 00 • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On NOTE Function name Current value Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Reference • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE]. Transpos 005 Function number After a few seconds, the Function name may be replaced with the setting value depending on the selected Function. NOTE • The Function number does not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat value appears instead. Function List Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style while a Style is selected. (page 22) 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song while a Song is selected. (page 27) 003 [AUX IN] Audio Volume AuxInVol 000–127 50 Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [AUX IN] jack (page 30). 004 [USB TO HOST] Audio Volume USBINVol 000–127 100 Adjusts the volume of audio playback, input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal (page 48). 005 Transpose Transpos -12–12 006 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. 007 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6; PSR-E363, YPT-360)/ 028–103 (E0–G6; PSR-EW300) 54 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 008 Touch Response TouchRes 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed) Overall 0 2 (Medium) Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. Refer to the page 18. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 45 The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Style file 009 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 23). * Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing along with a Song or a Style. Main Voice (page 16) 010 Volume M.Volume 000–127 011 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 012 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice (page 17) Reference 013 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–574 * Selects a Dual Voice. 014 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 015 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 016 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice (page 17) 017 Split Voice S.Voice 001–574 * Selects a Split Voice. 018 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 019 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 020 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 021 Reverb Type Reverb 1–4 (Hall 1–4) 5 (Cathedral) 6–8 (Room 1–3) 9–10 (Stage 1–2) 11–12 (Plate 1–2) 13 (Off) ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (13). (page 75) 022 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 023 Chorus Type Chorus 1 (Chorus1) 2 (Chorus2) 3 (Chorus3) 4 (Flanger1) 5 (Flanger2) 6 (off) ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 75) 024 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 025 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker) 2 (Headphone) 3 (Boost) 4 (Piano) 5 (Bright) 6 (Mild) 026 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 Effects 027 Voice Output VoiceOut 1 (Normal) 2 (Separate) OFF Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off. (page 18) Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output or headphone 1 (Speaker) output for optimum sound in different listening situations. (page 44) C Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio device to be canceled or lowered (page 31). When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 21) is on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the perDuo mode: formance sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, 2 (Separate) and the performance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker. Split Mode: 1 (Normal) Harmony/Arpeggio (page 19) 46 028 Harmony/ Arpeggio Type Harm/Arp 001–026 (Harmony) 027–176 (Arpeggio) * Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is selected. 029 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. 030 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo 1 (Original) 2 (Thru) ** Determines the Arpeggio velocity. If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume regardless of your playing strength. 031 Pedal Function Pdl Func 1 (Sustain) 2 (Arp Hold) 3 (Hold+Sus) * Refer to the page 20. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions MIDI 032 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 033 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 034 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. ON Determines whether Audio sound input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal is returned to the computer or not with the performance played on the instrument. If you want to output only the sound played on this instrument to the computer, set this parameter to OFF. 035 Audio Loop Back LoopBack ON/OFF TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. Reference Audio (page 30) Metronome (page 16) 036 Time Signature Numerator 037 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note 038 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Select a Song you want to use for the lessons, select the “RPart,” then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part. Lesson (page 32) 039 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 040 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Select a Song you want to use for the lessons, select the “L-Part,” then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 2 for the left part. 041 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are playing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed you are playing at. 042 Guide Guide ON/OFF ON Determines whether the Guide note sounds (ON) or not (OFF) during the “Waiting” lesson. Demo (page 27) 043 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 (Demo) 2 (Preset) 3 (User) 4 (Download) 1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group. 044 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 (Normal) 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode. AutoOff OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (minutes) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. Battery 1 (Alkaline) 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery Auto Power Off (page 13) 045 Auto Power Off Time Battery (page 13) 046 Battery Type * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 47 Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad Connecting to a computer Connecting the [USB TO HOST] terminal of this instrument and the computer via a USB cable allows you to transmit/receive MIDI and Audio data (USB Audio) to/from the computer. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 8) “Computer-related Operations.” The [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting on this instrument does not affect the signal output to USB Audio. USB terminal [USB TO HOST] terminal Reference computer instrument USB cable NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. • If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 47) to OFF. Otherwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings of the computer or the application software. Files that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 Song files created on an external device such as other instrument or a computer can be transferred between the computer and this instrument. User Song recorded on this instrument cannot be transferred to a computer as a single file, but can be stored as a part of backup file. • Style: (.sty) This instrument doesn’t have a function for creating Styles. However, Style files created on another instrument or a computer can be transferred to this instrument from the computer. 50KB is the maximum capacity for one Style file. Style files over this limit are not shown in the display. • Backup File*: PSR-E363.BUP (PSR-E363)/ PSREW300.BUP (PSR-EW300)/ YPT-360.BUP (YPT-360) * Backup parameters (as described in next chapter) other than “Passing Status of Keys to Success” can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 8) “Computerrelated Operations.” NOTE • Files that can be transferred to this instrument is up to approx. 1.3MB total for Songs and Styles. NOTE • If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to register it to this instrument for Style playback. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on page 23. NOTE • Song, Style and keyboard performance data are transmitted to an external device via MIDI by playing the Song or Style, or by playing the keyboard. As for Songs, only User Song data can be transmitted to an external device via MIDI by playing back the Song. Connecting an iPhone/iPad By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument, you can take advantage of various functions. For details on connections, refer to the online PDF manual (page 8) “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.” For information about the compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: https://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ NOTICE • If you are using a DAW (digital audio workstation) with this instrument, set the Audio Loop Back (page 47) to OFF. Otherwise, a loud sound may occur, depending on the settings of the computer or the application software. 48 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Backup and Initialization Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. Backup parameters other than “Passing Status of Keys to Success” can be transferred and saved to a computer as a single Backup file (with the extension: .BUP). This backup file can be loaded to the instrument for future. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the online PDF manual (page 8) “Computerrelated Operations.” Initialization You can initialize your original data via the following two methods. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. PSR-E363, YPT-360 Reference The highest white key Backup parameters • • • • • User Songs (page 41) Style Number 166–175 (page 23) Registration Memory (page 43) Passing Status of Keys to Success (page 34) FUNCTION Settings: (page 45) Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Battery Type, Guide, Audio Loop Back In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. PSR-EW300 Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data registered to Style numbers 166–175 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. PSR-E363, YPT-360 The highest white key and the three highest black keys PSR-EW300 NOTICE • Keep in mind that Backup Clear and Flash Clear also delete the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 49 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with the application on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 47 Function 032.) Appendix Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 26), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 48 notes—including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the Harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to produce the Harmony effect. For Types 06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “Function Settings” on page 47 (Function 033). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. • Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-related function. • The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on. The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 45 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 45 Function 007). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. 50 The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. • • • • The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the included AC adaptor. Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 13). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (Function 045; page 47). When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. The protection circuit has been activated due to over current. This may occur when an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, or an AC adaptor is damaged. Use the specified adaptor (page 77) only. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Appendix MEMO PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 51 Song Book Sample This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/ * The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish. This example introduces part of the English song book. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic Song No.004 Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! Appendix First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 52 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys D E F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Appendix C 3 black keys Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note Whole note rest Dotted half note Dotted half note rest Half note Half note rest Dotted quarter note Dotted quarter note rest Quarter note Time signature Notes and Rests Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note Eighth note rest Sixteenth note Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 53 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency. Appendix From here... 54 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic From here... Appendix ...to here Für Elise Basic ...to here PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 55 Song Book Sample Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.004 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E Appendix M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 56 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Appendix Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 57 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Appendix Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first phrase. 58 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual C Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble Appendix playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 59 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The first note has a staccato dot. Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his Appendix “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 60 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual E C E Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!” Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands. Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Right Appendix Left Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the finishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 61 Voice List Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 48-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 48 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127. ” For these cases, it is necessary to subtract 1 from the intended program change number to select the appropriate sound, because this list uses a “1–128” numbering system. For example, to select program change number 38 in the list below, transmit program change number 37. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Appendix 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 62 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky Tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 115 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 121 40 Funk Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 Strings 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 115 50 Marcato Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 116 66 Sax Section 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 116 62 Octave Brass 0 113 63 80s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 115 63 Funky Brass 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 112 74 Flute Voice List 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw 0 112 88 Under Heim 0 112 85 Portatone 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 121 82 Funky Lead 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven 0 121 89 Dream Heaven 0 113 89 Symbiont 0 112 99 Stardust 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani WORLD 0 112 106 Banjo 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 98 106 Oud 0 96 106 Rabab 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 0 114 105 Tanpura 0 96 112 Pungi 0 117 74 Bansuri 0 0 105 Sitar 1 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 0 112 Shehnai 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 116 117 Tabla 0 115 111 Er Hu 0 118 74 Di Zi 0 116 106 Pi Pa 0 113 108 Gu Zheng 0 40 47 Yang Qin 0 120 111 Morin Khuur 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto 0 96 108 Taisho-kin DUAL* – – – Octave Piano – – – Piano & Strings Voice No. 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) – – – Piano Pad – – – Octave Harpsichord – – – Tiny Electric Piano – – – Electric Piano Pad – – – Full Organ – – – Octave Jazz Guitar – – – Octave Strings – – – Orchestra Section – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings – – – Strings Session – – – Brass Tutti – – – Orchestra Tutti – – – Octave French Horns – – – Octave Harp – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani – – – Octave Choir – – – Jazz Brass Section – – – Jazz Section – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble – – – Ballroom Brass – – – Flute & Clarinet – – – Trumpet & Trombone – – – Fat Synth Brass – – – Octave Lead – – – Super 5th Lead SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 113 116 Hand Clap 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 128 StdKit 1 + Chinese Perc. 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 126 0 41 Cuban Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit ARPEGGIO** – – – Concerto – – – Latin Rock – – – Brass Section – – – Piano Ballad – – – Synth Sequence – – – Guitarist – – – Pickin' – – – Spanish – – – Funky Clavi – – – Harpeggio – – – Finger Bass Left – – – Combo Jazz Left – – – Paul's Bass Left – – – Trance Bass Left – – – Acid Bass Left – – – Piano Ballad Left PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Appendix Voice No. 63 Voice List Voice No. 232 233 234 235 Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) – – – – – – – – – – – – Voice Name Salsa Piano Left Piano Arpeggio Left Guitar Arpeggio Left Strum Left * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. ** Selecting a Voice number between 216 and 235 will turn on Arpeggio. XGlite Voice List Voice No. Appendix 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 64 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky Tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky Tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 1 0 64 11 Music Box 2 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ 0 0 20 Church Organ 1 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 1 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass Voice List 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 0 48 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 1 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 1 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 1 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe Voice No. 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 1 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Appendix Voice No. 65 Voice List Voice No. 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 Appendix 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 66 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 65 103 Big Pan 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 1 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 64 0 84 64 0 85 64 0 86 64 0 87 64 0 88 64 0 89 64 0 90 64 0 91 64 0 97 64 0 98 64 0 99 64 0 100 64 0 101 64 0 113 64 0 114 64 0 115 64 0 116 Voice Name Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1.” • Each percussion voice uses one-note polyphony. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “Standard Kit 1,” the “Seq Click H” (Note #36/Note C1) corresponds to MIDI (Note #24/Note C0). C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 198 127/000/001 199 127/000/002 200 127/000/009 201 127/000/017 202 127/000/025 203 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Snare Soft 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Noisy Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electronic Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog L Bass Drum Analog H Side Stick Analog Snare Analog 1 Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight 2 Snare Room H Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electronic 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electronic 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electronic 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electronic 4 Tom Electronic 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electronic 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 1 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Appendix C1 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note # Note Note # Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H Scratch L Scratch H Scratch L PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 67 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 Appendix F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 68 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note # Note Note # Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 198 127/000/001 204 127/000/113 205 127/000/033 206 127/000/041 207 127/000/049 208 126/000/128 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit StdKit 1 + Chinese Perc. Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Brush Slap 2 Bass Drum Soft L Bass Drum Jazz Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare 1 Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap Tom Brush 1 Band Snare 2 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal 1 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal 1 Short Cowbell Analog Hand Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H Scratch L PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Drum Kit List * Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list. C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 210 126/000/115 Indian Kit 1 Indian Kit 2 Indian Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hateli Long Hatheli Long Hateli Short Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ge Baya ke Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ghe Baya ka Baya ka Tabla na Tabla na Tabla tin Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Dhol 1 Open Tablabaya dhin Dhol 1 Slap Tabla di Dhol 1 Mute Tablabaya dhe Dhol 1 Open Slap Tabla ti Dhol 1 Roll Tabla ne Dandia Short Tabla taran Dandia Long Tabla tak Chutki Chipri Chipri Kanjira Open Khanjira Open Kanjira Slap Khanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Khanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Khanjira Bendup Kanjira Bend down Khanjira Benddown Dholak Open Dholak 1 Open Dholak Mute Dholak 1 Mute Dholak Slap Dholak 1 Slap Dhol Open Dhol 2 Open Dhol Mute Dhol 2 Slap Dhol Slap Dhol 2 Rim Dhol Slide Mridangam na Mridangam Normal Mridangam din Mridangam Open Mridangam ki Mridangam Mute Mridangam ta Mridangam Slap Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Rim Mridangam Lo Closed Chimta Open Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Hi Open Dholki Mute Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Lo Open Dholki Slide Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Rim Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Slide Khol Mute Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Open Manjira Close Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Open Mondira Close Mondira Close Mridang Open Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Mridang Mute Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Mridang Rim Indian Bhangra Scat 3 Mridang Slide Indian Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Thavil Open Madal-A#2 Thavil Slap Madal-B2 Thavil Mute Madal-C3 Khartaal Madal-C#3 Dholak 2 Open Madal-D3 Dholak 2 Slide Madal-D#3 Dholak 2 Rim 1 Madal-E3 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Madal-F3 Dholak 2 Ring Madal-F#3 Dholak 2 Slap Madal-G3 211 126/000/037 212 126/000/041 213 126/000/001 214 126/000/002 215 126/000/113 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Drum Loop Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Appendix C1 209 126/000/040 Huuaah! Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 Maou PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 69 Song List Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 Appendix 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 70 Song Name Top Picks Demo 1 (Yamaha Original) Demo 2 (Yamaha Original) Demo 3 (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) Santa Lucia (A. Longo) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Greensleeves (Traditional) Kalinka (Traditional) Holdilia Cook (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) La Cucaracha (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst) The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin) Die Moldau (B. Smetana) Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar) Humoresques (A. Dvořák) Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvořák) Favorite with Style O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Song No. 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song No. 103–112 113–124 125–154 Song Name Muffin Man (R. A. King) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) Instrument Master Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) Deck the Halls (Traditional) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) Special Appendix Touch Tutor TTutor01–TTutor10 Chord Study ChdStd01–ChdStd12 Chord Progression Maj1234–min1476 • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/ Style List 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Style Name 8BEAT BritPopRock 8BeatModern Cool8Beat Happy8Beat Shake8Beat ContemporaryRock StadiumRock 70sRock HardRock 1 60sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60s8Beat 8Beat OffBeat Folkrock 60sRock HardRock 2 RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PopShuffle GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle HipHopLight BALLAD 70sGlamPiano PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad DANCE ClubBeat Electronica FunkyHouse RetroClub USHipHop MellowHipHop Chillout EuroTrance Ibiza SwingHouse Clubdance ClubLatin Garage 1 Garage 2 TechnoParty UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO ModernDisco 70sDisco LatinDisco Style No. 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Style Name SaturdayNight DiscoHands SWING&JAZZ BigBandFast BigBandBallad AcousticJazz AcidJazz JazzClub Swing 1 Swing 2 Five/Four Dixieland Ragtime R&B BluesRock Soul DetroitPop 60sRock&Roll 6/8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll ComboBoogie 6/8Blues COUNTRY CountryPop CountrySwing Country2/4 Bluegrass LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova Forro Sertanejo 1 Sertanejo 2 Baião Vallenato Joropo Parranda Merengue Reggaeton Tijuana PasoDuranguense CumbiaGrupera BaladaBanda MexicanMambo Mambo Salsa Beguine Reggae WORLD ScottishReel 4/4Standart Rumba2/4 Saeidy WehdaSaghira IranianElec Emarati AfricanGospelReggae HighLife AfricanGospel Style No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 Style Name IndianPop Bhangra Bhajan BollyMix Tamil Kerala GoanPop Rajasthan Dandiya Qawwali FolkHills ModernDangdut Keroncong XiQingLuoGu YiZuMinGe JingJuJieZou BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive TRADITIONAL US March 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberkrainerPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz WALTZ ItalianWaltz SwingWaltz JazzWaltz ValsMexicano CountryWaltz OberkrainerWalzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2/4 Learning4/4 Learning6/8 PIANIST Stride PianoSwing PianoBoogie Arpeggio Habanera SlowRock 8BeatPianoBallad 6/8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Appendix Style No. 71 Music Database List MDB No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Appendix 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 72 MDB Name ALL TIME HITS Jude Hey Jumping WrldRock All OK YourTune USASurf JustCall Get home GtrWheel IWasBorn Sailing BluJeans Holiday Imagine Marriage WiteShde NowNever Hard Day USA Pie Norway YesterBd A Magic POP & ROCK Cheerful SwftShke Watches PrtTmLvr S Party MoonShdw NikitSng GirlsMne Radio Attempt OnAStrng WhatWant ThankFor Tmbourin RubyGirl TopWorld TeachSng EachMin ShakenUp CrocRock HurryLov Champion Jailhous Rock&Rll HonkyTnk JustU&Me LveSmile Wish I BALLAD Red Lady IvoryAnd TheWorld Paradise Whisper MDB No. 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual MDB Name Woman CndleWnd FlyAway LoveYou SavingAl InTheDrk SayYou ThisWay Inspirng OLDIES Diana’s Tonight SandLter NoRain Ghetto PrettyWm Sherry Sally’s DANCE & DISCO FevrNite StyAlive Westerly Run Free DISCO JoelLife Coupled SingBack Janeiro BoomRoom DontHide RewCraig LondonRU WerUBeen MkeMusic 10,2 Sun Believe MarieClb SWING & JAZZ MoonOf Patrol Rhythm CatSwing Misbehav Safari SoWhatIs TimeGone TasteHny TwoFoot Blk&Whte EnterRag TakeFour Birdland MistyFln COUNTRY OnTheRd BlueSong InMyMind ContryHw MDB No. 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 MDB Name GreenGrs EverNeed Lucille Tennesse LATIN Brasil ChryPink MyShadow BosaWave DntWorry JelsTngo I'mPola MamboJm OneNote PasoCani Beguine Tijuana Puntuali Cielito The Liar Unfrgivn ENTERTAINMENT Raindrop Califrag CatMemry MyPrince NoBuiz JinglBel SilentNt Christms Favorite RedRdolf MoonWlz AroundWd WALTZ & TRAD DadClock RockBaby SomeLara Doodah! Dreamer Birthday Sunshine TexRose ThePolka Yankee’s DanubeWz D'amor Reine de MnchHaus Comrades VanMass ClariPka Effect Type List Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 001 Duet 002 Trio 003 Block 004 Country 005 Octave 006 Trill 1/4 note 007 Trill 1/6 note Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song Trill 1/8 note 009 Trill 1/12 note 010 Trill 1/16 note 011 Trill 1/24 note 012 Trill 1/32 note 013 Tremolo 1/4 note 014 Tremolo 1/6 note 015 Tremolo 1/8 note 016 Tremolo 1/12 note 017 Tremolo 1/16 note 018 Tremolo 1/24 note 019 Tremolo 1/32 note 020 Echo 1/4 note 021 Echo 1/6 note 022 Echo 1/8 note 023 Echo 1/12 note 024 Echo 1/16 note 025 Echo 1/24 note 026 Echo 1/32 note If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. (The trill speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you keep holding down a note, the note is repeated continuously. Appendix 008 that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you play a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 73 Effect Type List Arpeggio Type List Appendix Arpeggio No. 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 74 Arpeggio Name UpOct DownOct UpDwnOct SynArp1 SynArp2 SynArp3 SynArp4 SyncEcho PulsLine StepLine Random Down&Up SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Planet Trance1 Trance2 Trance3 ChordAlt SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Syncopa Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 Hybrid4 Hybrid5 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PfArp4 PfClub1 PfClub2 PfBallad PfChd8th EPArp PfShufle PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 RocknPf 70RockPf SlowflPf SoulPf ChordUp ChdDance LatinRck Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BalladEP Strum1 Strum2 Strum3 Strum4 Pickin1 Pickin2 Funky Arpeggio No. 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Arpeggio Name GtrChrd1 GtrChrd2 GtrChrd3 GtrArp FngrPck1 FngrPck2 CleanGtr Slowfl Samba1 Samba2 Spanish1 Spanish2 Harp1 Harp2 FngrBas1 FngrBas2 FngrBas3 CoolFunk SlapBass AcidBas1 AcidBas2 FunkyBas CmbJazB1 CmbJazB2 CmbJazB3 NewR&BBs HipHopBs SmoothBs DreamBas TranceBs LatinBas Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Strings4 StrngDwn StrngUp OrcheStr Jupiter Pizz1 Pizz2 BrasSec1 BrasSec2 BrasSec3 FunkBras SoulReed DiscoLd SmoothPd PercArp Ethnic Cresendo DiscoCP Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 Funk3 Soul ClscHip Smooth NewGospl CmbJazz1 CmbJazz2 Arpeggio No. 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 Arpeggio Name Bebop JazzHop FolkRock Unpluggd HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza1 Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage Samba African Latin China Indian Arabic • When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176, select the corresponding Voice below as the Main Voice. 143–173: Select a Drum Kit (Voice No.198– 207). 174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.” (Voice No.208). 175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.209) or “Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.210). 176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.211). Effect Type List Reverb Types No. 01–04 Reverb Type Hall 1–4 Description Concert hall reverb. 05 Cathedral Rich reverb simulating the acoustics of a cathedral. Good for pipe organ sounds. 06–08 Room 1–3 Small room reverb. 09–10 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 11–12 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 13 Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description Chorus 1–3 4–5 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. 6 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Appendix 1–3 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 75 Specifications Product Name Dimensions (W x D x H) Size/Weight Weight Keyboard Control Interface Display Panel Tone Generation Number of Keys Touch Response Type Backlight Language Language Tone Generation Technology Polyphony (max.) Voices Preset Number of Voices Compatibility Types Effects Functions Preset Reverb Chorus Master EQ Dual Split Panel Sustain Harmony Arpeggio Melody Suppressor Number of Styles Fingering Style Control Appendix Accompaniment Styles External Styles Other Features Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Compatibility Preset Songs (MIDI) Recording Format Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Playback Recording Lesson Functions Storage and Connectivity Sound System 76 USB Audio (USB TO HOST) Registration Number of Buttons Memory Metronome Tempo Range Overall Controls Transpose Tuning Duo Miscellaneous PIANO Button Storage Internal Memory DC IN Headphones/Output Connectivity Sustain Pedal AUX IN USB TO HOST Amplifiers Speakers PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual PSR-E363, YPT-360 PSR-EW300 Digital Keyboard 945mm x 369mm x 118mm 1152mm x 369mm x 118mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-5/8”) (45-3/8” x 14-1/2” x 4-5/8”) 4.6kg (10 lbs 2 oz.) 6.2kg (13 lbs 11 oz.) (not including batteries) (not including batteries) 61 76 Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed LCD Yes English English AWM Stereo Sampling 48 574 (197 Panel Voices + 18 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices) GM/XGlite 12 types 5 types 6 types Yes Yes Yes 26 types 150 types Yes 165 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL 10 158 Yes Style File Format (SFF) 154 (including Touch Tutor: 10, Chord Study: 12, Chord Progression: 30) 5 2 Approx. 10,000 notes SMF Formats 0 & 1 Original File Format KEYS TO SUCCESS, Lesson 1–3 (Listening, Timing, Waiting), Phrase Repeat, A-B Repeat, Chord Dictionary, Touch Tutor, Chord Study, Chord Progression 44.1kHz, 16bit, stereo 9 Yes 11–280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) Yes Yes (Portable Grand Button) Approx. 1.3MB 12V Standard stereo phone jack (PHONES/OUTPUT) Yes Yes (Stereo mini jack) Yes 2.5W + 2.5W 12cm x 2 Specifications AC Adaptor Power Supply Power Supply Batteries Power Consumption Auto Power Off Included Accessories Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C,PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Six 1.5V “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or six 1.2V “AA” size Ni-MH rechargeable batteries (HR6) 5W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor) Yes • Music rest • Owner’s Manual • AC adaptor *1 (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) • Online Member Product Registration *1: May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • AC adaptor: Separately Sold Accessories (May not be available depending on your area.) Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Keyboard stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • Wireless MIDI adaptor: UD-BT01 Appendix * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual 77 Index A H A-B Repeat .............................29 AC Adaptor ............................. 12 Accessories ............................77 ACMP .....................................22 Arpeggio ................................. 19 Arpeggio Type ........................ 74 Arpeggio Velocity ....................46 audio .......................................30 Audio Device ..........................30 Auto Accompaniment ..............22 Auto Accompaniment range ...22 AUTO FILL ..............................24 Auto Power Off .................. 13, 47 AUX IN ....................................30 Harmony ................................ 19 Harmony Type .................. 20, 73 Headphones ........................... 14 B Backup Parameters ................49 Batteries .................................. 12 Battery Type ...................... 13, 47 Beat ........................................ 15 BGM .......................................28 C Appendix Chord ................................ 15, 25 Chord Dictionary .....................26 Chord Progressions ................40 Chord Study ............................39 Chorus .................................... 18 Chorus Type .....................46, 75 Clear (Backup parameters) .....49 Clear (User Song) ..................42 computer .................................48 Computer-related Operations ...8 D Demo ................................ 27, 47 Display .................................... 15 Drum Kit List ...........................67 Dual Voice .........................17, 46 Duo .........................................21 Initial Send ............................. 47 Initialization ............................ 49 INTRO .................................... 24 iPad ........................................ 48 iPhone .................................... 48 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual .................................. 8 K Key Transpose ................... 45 Keyboard Display ................... 15 Keys To Success .................... 33 L Lesson .................................... 32 Listening ................................. 36 Local Control .......................... 47 M MAIN ...................................... 24 Main Voice .............................. 16 Master EQ .............................. 44 Measure ................................. 15 Melody Suppressor ................ 31 Metronome ............................. 16 MIDI Basics .............................. 8 MIDI Reference ........................ 8 Music Database ..................... 23 Music Database List ............... 72 music rest ............................... 14 Musicsoft Downloader ............ 23 N Notation .................................. 15 O E One Touch Setting .................. 16 Effect Type List .......................73 Effects .....................................18 ENDING .................................24 External Clock ........................47 P F Fast Forward ...........................28 Fast Reverse ...........................28 Footswitch ......................... 14, 20 Function List ...........................45 Functions ................................45 G GM System Level 1 ...................8 Grade ......................................36 Guide Note .............................37 78 I Panel Sustain ......................... 18 Part ......................................... 29 Passing Status ....................... 34 Pause ..................................... 28 Pedal ...................................... 14 Phrase Repeat ....................... 35 Pitch Transpose ................. 45 Pitch Tuning ....................... 45 Playback ................................. 28 Portable Grand ....................... 16 Power Requirements .............. 12 R Random playback ................... 28 Recording ............................... 41 Recording (track) .................... 42 Registration Memory .............. 43 PSR-E363, PSR-EW300, YPT-360 Owner’s Manual Reverb ....................................18 Reverb Level .......................... 46 Reverb Type ..................... 46, 75 rhythm .................................... 22 rit. ........................................... 24 S Sections ................................. 24 Song ...................................... 27 Song Book ............................... 8 Song Book Sample ................ 52 Song Category ....................... 27 Song List ................................ 70 Specifications ..........................76 Split Point .................... 17, 22, 45 Split Voice ......................... 17, 46 Style ....................................... 22 Style File ............................ 8, 23 Style List ................................ 71 Sustain ....................................14 Synchro Start ......................... 22 T Tap function ........................... 24 Tempo .........................16, 24, 27 Time Signature ........................16 Timing .................................... 36 Touch Response .....................18 Touch Tutor ............................ 38 Track ...................................... 41 Transpose .............................. 45 Troubleshooting ...................... 50 Tuning .................................... 45 U USB Audio ............................. 48 USB TO HOST ....................... 48 User Songs ............................ 41 V Voice .......................................16 Voice List ............................... 62 Volume ..............................14, 45 Volume (AUX IN) .................... 45 Volume (Harmony) ................. 46 Volume (Metronome) ............. 47 Volume (Style, Song) ............. 45 Volume (USB TO HOST) ....... 45 Volume (Voice) ....................... 46 W Waiting ................................... 36 X XGlite ....................................... 8 Y Your Tempo ............................ 47 Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries: These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. For business users in the European Union: If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union: These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the EU Battery Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_02) 79 LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, PSRE, PSREW, PSRF, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. © 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America. MEMO For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. FRANCE NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900, México Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Via Tinelli N.67/69 20855 Gerno di Lesmo (MB), Italy Tel: +39-039-9065-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland in Thalwil Seestrasse 18a, 8800 Thalwil, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA/CZECH REPUBLIC/ HUNGARY/ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/ SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddział w Polsce ul. Wielicka 52, 02-657 Warszawa, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 MALTA CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 CYPRUS Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 DMI20 Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 TURKEY BULGARIA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited P-401, JMD Megapolis, Sector-48, Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122018, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 06169, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd., Banqiao Dist., New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Global Site https://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2017 Yamaha Corporation Published 04/2017 PO##*.*-**B0 Printed in China ZY73930-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha YPT-360 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha YPT-360 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha YPT-360 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha YPT-360 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha YPT-360 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha YPT-360 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha YPT-360 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha YPT-360 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha YPT-360 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha YPT-360 Uživatelský manuál
- 日本語: Yamaha YPT-360 ユーザーマニュアル
- svenska: Yamaha YPT-360 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha YPT-360 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha YPT-360 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha YPT-360 Manual de utilizare
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha EZ300 61 Full-Size Lighted Touch Sensitive Keyboard de handleiding
-
Yamaha Portatone PSR-E213 de handleiding
-
Yamaha PSR-E313 Handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
-
-